JP2019013419A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing management of a game machine.SOLUTION: A main control board 61 includes a setting key insertion part 68a, and a setting state of a Pachinko machine 10 can be changed by starting to supply operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 in a state in which ON operation is performed by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a. A winning probability of a jackpot result at least in a low-probability mode varies according to the setting state of the Pachinko machine 10. Game history information is stored in a management IC 66, and a management result of a game history is calculated by utilizing the history information at calculation timing. The management result is displayed on notification display devices 69a to 69c and the display state is maintained. When a setting value is changed on the notification display devices 69a to 69c, the corresponding display is performed. When an abnormal state is notified, the corresponding display is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine has a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to a player on the front side of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish reservoir are discharged to the lower dish reservoir (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably managing gaming machines.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 comprises history storage execution means for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means,
The history storage executing means includes means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably manage gaming machines.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding discharge | emission of the game ball which flowed down the game area | region. It is a front view of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables memorize | stored in main side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the main side CPU input the detection result of a entrance detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of IC for management. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for correspondence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that log | history information is stored in the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the output process of the setting value update signal performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display output process performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed with management side CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables memorize | stored in the main side ROM in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for another storage in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repeated change performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repeated change performed by the main side CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by the management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display output process performed in management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path | route which transmits the detection result of each entrance detection sensor in 10th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. It is a front view of the main controller in an 11th embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure for performing various displays in the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting based on control of MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display aspect of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting in case the management result of a game history is displayed, (b) When the setting state of a pachinko machine is changed It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the display apparatus for 1st-4th notification will be in a display state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st alerting | reporting display apparatus in 12th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 2nd alerting | reporting display apparatus. The first notification display device when displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices and when displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine can be changed It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 2nd alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed in main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the abnormality display area in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality setting process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality display performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed by the main side CPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the main side CPU in another form.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is one game ball entering the first operation port 33 or one game ball entering the second operation port 34 is generated. In the case where one prize ball is paid out and one game ball is thrown into the general prize opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out and the special prize winning device 32 is paid out. When one game ball enters, 15 prize balls are paid out.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display part 37a, a winning change to the first working port 33 or a winning to the second working port 34 is used as a trigger, and a lottery is performed to display a variation display or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special figure display part 37a is comprised by the segment display by which several segment light emission parts are arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when a special symbol display unit 37a displays a change or predetermined display of a pattern based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and numbers “1” to “9” are attached to the symbol rows. The symbols are scrolled and displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol sequences is started first, and the display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol sequence → the lower symbol sequence → the middle symbol sequence. The process ends with the symbols still displayed. Then, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the same odd symbol combination is stopped when the most advantageous jackpot result described later is displayed, and the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the lower probability winning result described later is described. If the winning combination is not the same symbol combination, the combination of symbols that are not displayed in a stopped state is stopped.

  The symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that is shifted to after winning the winning combination. Is called. In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and can be switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area PA.

  As already described, the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is any one of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the game area PA is discharged. A game ball that has entered any of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 flow down through the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 that have flowed in, and are led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and become a discharge ball collection portion (not shown). Collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning ports 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning port detection sensor 42 a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. A game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a in the middle of passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and a game that has entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side of the game is entered. The ball is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning ports 31 on the right side at a midway position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side region by joining the inlet side regions in the middle. doing. A third winning port detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. A game ball that has entered one of the two general winning ports 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning port detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  Corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, a fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists. A special electric detection sensor 45 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and a game ball that has entered the special electric prize device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first working port 33. A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and a game ball that has entered the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second working port 34. A second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and a game ball that has entered the second operation port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and a game ball that has entered the out-port 24 a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  In addition, the game ball which became a detection target by any one detection sensor 42a-48a among the various detection sensors 42a-48a does not become a detection target of the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 in the middle of flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect game balls. The various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a situation where a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal in a situation where a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). FIG. 5 is a front view of the main controller 60.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The substrate box 60a is formed to be transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be seen from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The substrate box 60a is colorless and transparent. However, the substrate box 60a may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the substrate box 60a. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually check the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. The MPU 62 can be viewed through the opposing wall portion 60b.

  The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 60c prevent the separation of the case bodies 60c and the traces when the case bodies 60c are separated. A coupling portion 60e is provided for leaving A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if the part of the coupling part 60e is broken and the case body 60c is separated in a state where the separation of the case body 60c is prevented using the part of the coupling part 60e, another coupling is performed thereafter. Separation of the case body 60c can be prevented again by setting the portion 60e in the coupled state. Further, when the case portion 60c is separated, the coupling portion 60e is destroyed and the trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether the case body 60c is illegally separated by visually confirming the coupling portion 60e. It becomes possible. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side opposite to the side where the coupling portion 60e is arranged in the substrate box 60a so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the seal seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. Thereby, when the seal seal 60f is peeled off at the time of separation of the case body 60c, it becomes possible to leave the trace.

  In the main control device 60 configured as described above, the main control board 61 is owned by the manager of the game hall in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. A setting key insertion unit 68a that is turned on when the setting key is inserted; an update button 68b that is operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the ON operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit 68a; A reset button 68c that is operated to clear data in a later-described main RAM 65 provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history; , Is provided. The MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 is connected to a connection terminal of the external device in order to read the game history management result or information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. A reading terminal 68d is provided. Note that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to six levels of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of levels.

  These setting key insertion portion 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, reading terminal 68d (ie, MPU 62) and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall 60b of the board box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion part 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered with the wall part 60b. In other words, the opposing wall portion 60b has individual openings corresponding to the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d. Thus, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without opening the board box 60a, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c can be pressed. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

  When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and rotated in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. It is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, starting the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). It becomes a changeable state. In this state, every time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in ascending order within the range of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. When the update button 68b is operated in the state of “setting 6”, it is updated to “setting 1”. In addition, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a from the ON operation position in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played with the set value at that time. That is, the set value cannot be changed even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends.

  The ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, even if the ON operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit 68a after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the setting value cannot be changed.

  The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of “setting n” (n is an integer from “1” to “6”) (that is, setting). The higher the value), the higher the advantage. Although the details will be described later, there are a low probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as the success / failure lottery mode for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the set value is The higher the probability of winning the jackpot result in the low probability mode, the higher the probability. On the other hand, regardless of the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant.

  The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above. In order to generate the clearing of the data, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the reset button 68c being pressed is performed. (That is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 needs to be started). The ON operation for the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

  As described above, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the game history management result or information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to perform external output to the terminal, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (that is, the operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62) Need to start supplying power). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the external output to the external device is not performed.

  Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but is not limited thereto, and is a single multicolor light emitting type. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed such that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and by the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparently, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c accommodated in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as described above, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the substrate box 60a. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are made through the opposing wall portion 60b. The display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c can be visually observed.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only the numbers “0” to “9” but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, the numbers “0” to “9” are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the details of the notification will be described later in detail. In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Note that a value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. In addition, the set value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current set value is the first to third notification. It is good also as a structure displayed on the other one display apparatus for notification among the display apparatuses 69a-69c.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism portion 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main-side RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages a game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the history of entering the game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined in accordance with the determined winning history. Further, the management IC 66 grasps the frequency of occurrence of an opening / closing execution mode and a high frequency support mode, which will be described later.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 67 is connected to a power source / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, each of the winning detection sensors 42a to 49a includes the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection. A sensor 46a, a second working port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each entrance. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion portion 68a, an update button 68b, and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is disposed at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and it is detected by the sensor whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and it is detected by the sensor whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

  A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding entrance part corresponding to the payout of a game ball in the entrance part. The Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32 b that opens and closes the open / close door 32 a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34 b that opens and closes the electric utility item 34 a of the second operating port 34, A figure unit 37 and a universal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display part 37 a and a special figure holding display part 37 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38 a and a universal map hold display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is in the open state, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the power drive 34b so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 34a is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a. In addition, when a winning in the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs, or when a variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b. Is executed, and when the winning display to the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 38a, the display control of the general map hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

  First to third notification display devices 69 a to 69 c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In addition, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are controlled by the management IC 66 and are not controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66. In the display of the third notification display device 69c, the display control by the main CPU 63 is prioritized over the display control by the management IC 66.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may be configured to be controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main CPU 63 issues a setting value display instruction to the management IC 66. Good.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the game history management result in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the external device.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 78 and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source / launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. In addition, the power source / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In addition, the payout mechanism 73 is provided with a power switch as described above. When the power switch is turned on, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 while driving and controlling the display light emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display unit 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the utility power release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the utility power item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the utility power release state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The holding storage area 65a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and starting one game round At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric utility release counter C4 will be described. For example, the utility power release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250 and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general electric power holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general utility release counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric utility 34 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared to the game area PA in a situation where the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner, the utility object 34a of the second working port 34 is released per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric power open state in the electric power open lottery using the electric power utility opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. Has been. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public electric power is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a is generated a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display duration time for the display unit 38a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, but the release frequency and the release mode of the general utility 34a in the low frequency support mode are any. Even if it is a set value, it is the same, and the open frequency and the open mode of the utility model 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode varies in accordance with the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the utility appliance 34a. It is good also as a structure. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening of the power utility 34a in the low frequency support mode, and the second operation when the power utility 34a is opened once in the low frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure where the entrance probability of the game ball to the mouth 34 becomes high. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the power utility 34a in the high frequency support mode, and the second frequency when the power utility 34a is in the open state once in the high frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure where the entrance probability of the game ball to the operation port 34 becomes high.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As the success / failure tables, low-accuracy mode low-accuracy mode tables 64a to 64f and a high-probability mode high-accuracy mode table 64g are stored.

  The low probability tables 64a to 64f are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the setting states “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. That is, the low-probability table 64a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the setting that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. 2 low accuracy table 64b, the low accuracy table 64c for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. , A low probability table 64d for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state is low, a low probability table 64e for setting 5 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”, and the pachinko machine 10 And a low probability table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state is “setting 6”.

  These low probability tables 64a to 64f are set such that the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/320, and when the low probability table 64b for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/310. A big hit result is obtained, and when the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/300, and when the low probability table 64d for setting 4 is referenced, it is about 1/290. A big hit result is obtained, and when the low probability table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/280, and when the low probability table 64f for setting 6 is referenced, it is about 1/270. A jackpot result. As a result, if the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high set value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy determination table 64g is provided with only one type so as to be common in any setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. The high-accuracy determination table 64g is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is higher than that of the low-accuracy determination tables 64a to 64f in any of the setting states “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Specifically, when the high-accuracy table 64g is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/30. Thereby, regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to make the high probability mode more advantageous than the low probability mode. In addition, even in the lowest setting state “Setting 1”, it becomes possible to increase the probability of a jackpot result compared to the low setting mode “Setting 6” which is the highest setting state by entering the high probability mode. It becomes. Further, in the high probability mode, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring, and the storage capacity for preliminarily storing the high-accuracy determination table 64g in the main ROM 64 is suppressed. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric utility 34a of the two operation ports 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric prize device 32. That is. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electricity prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by a player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an opening continuation time is set that is shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will receive the maximum number of winnings in one round game. When the number of times is released, it is expected that no prize will be given to the special electric prize winning device 32 or that there will be about one even if a prize is generated.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. It is.

  The allocation destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a sorting table 64h as shown in FIG. And in the allocation table 64h, the low probability big hit result, the low winning high probability big hit result, and the most advantageous big hit result are set as the allocation destination of the big hit result when the big hit result is obtained.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning and winning big hit result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low winning big hit result and the most advantageous big hit result.

  In the distribution table 64h, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” is the low winning high probability big hit result. “15-29” corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  The distribution table 64h is provided with only one type so as to be common in any setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and a storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure from which the distribution aspect of a jackpot result differs according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous big hit result, and a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous big hit result or the low winning high probability winning result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of entering the high probability mode after the jackpot result. Also, the higher the set value, the lower the probability that it will be assigned to the low winning high-accuracy result may be lowered. It is good also as a structure which can be distributed to a jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode will occur.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The pachinko machine 10 is set with an expected effect as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The notice display includes a plurality of symbol strings in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol columns after the symbol variable display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission controller 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 is more prone to generate a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the miss results, and displays a notice display with a low appearance rate. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the probability that the reach display occurs in the game times that are the result of losing is the same in any of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage of the set state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring with respect to the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that are the result of losing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a reach display will occur in the game times that result in a miss.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (to be described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed in order for the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned ON (step S103: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is “excluding the area where the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. “0” is cleared (step S105). That is, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without the setting key insertion unit 68a being turned on, the setting value information is the operation to the pachinko machine 10. The main RAM 65 is cleared while maintaining the state before the supply of power is stopped. As a result, it is possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without changing the set value.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and when the predetermined power failure process is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to “1”. Will be set. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum stored when the power is shut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). . When the process of step S105 is executed or when an affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is determined to be abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more.

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, an operation prohibiting process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), an infinite loop is entered. The operation prohibiting process is canceled by executing a clear all process (step S117) described later.

  When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S106 to S108, a power-on setting process is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after executing the process of step S110, a recognition process (step S111) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and various data are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is executed (step S112). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S113 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S112 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S113 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S113 to S116. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S113 to S116 are repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S113 to S116 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S113, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S114, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in addition, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S115. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted is performed. When the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes of step S113 to step S116 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON-operated (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 also includes an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. All areas are cleared to “0” (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to “0” even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the entire main RAM 65 A configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not performed but the clearing process is performed when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

  Thereafter, a set value update process is executed in step S118, and after a set value update signal output process is executed in step S119, the process proceeds to step S110. Hereinafter, the setting value update process will be described. The output process of the set value update signal will be described in detail later. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing.

  First, “1” is set in the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When “1” is set in the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting value up to that point.

  After that, a set value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start process, the third notification display device 69c is controlled to display the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1”. The manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned OFF (step S203: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S206: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed, the setting value is updated to one level higher. When the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting value is set to “setting 1”. Will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process of step S207 is executed, a display update process for the set value is executed (step S208). In the set value display update process, display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that a number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is displayed. The manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processing after step S204 is executed again. If an OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), a set value display end process is executed (step S209). In the set value display end process, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67. Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S302). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S303, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S114, and in step S304, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S115.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S305). In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In subsequent step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processing after step S307 is executed.

  In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b is started, and the closed state should be switched to. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the incoming ball detection process is executed (step S309). In the entrance detection process, signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 are read. The presence / absence of a ball entering the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S311). In a situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec. In the subsequent step S312, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S308, the disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. I do.

  After that, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  Thereafter, the ordinary power control process is executed (step S314). In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility wire 34a of the second working port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. In the case of the opening / closing execution mode, even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In subsequent step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, output information is set for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure hold display unit 37b. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general map display unit 38a to the general map hold display unit 38b is set. In step S315, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). In addition, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure special power control process in step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, hold information acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred for the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. If a winning has occurred, the number of holds in the holding storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number of reserves is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the number of holds, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is used for holding. Stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In addition, when the winning to the 1st operation port 33 and the 2nd operation port 34 has generate | occur | produced simultaneously, within the range which performs the acquisition process of reservation information once, the process for acquiring the said reservation information is performed. Run multiple times. In addition, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition time command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

  Thereafter, the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special figure special electric address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electricity counter is obtained from the special figure special electricity address table (step S404), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes in steps S406 to S412 should be executed, and the special figure special electric address table is the special figure special electric counter. Corresponding to the numerical information, the start address of the program for executing the processing of step S406 to step S412 is set.

  In step S406, special figure variation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start process.

  In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S502) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of holdings is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. Specifically, the second reservation area RE2 → the first reservation area RE1. Then, after shifting the data in each area such as the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3, the fourth reserved area RE4 is cleared to “0”. At this time, a shift time command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

  After executing the data setting process, the success / failure table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, information indicating the success / failure lottery mode of the main RAM 65 is read to grasp the current success / failure lottery mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the high-probability table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65. Then, the low-probability tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped setting values are read from the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, the success / failure determination process is executed with reference to the success / failure tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the success / failure determination process, the information for determination of success / failure among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 is the jackpot numerical value information set in the determination tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not it matches.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information relating to the big hit type counter C2 is read. Then, with reference to the sorting table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the read numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, which jackpot result corresponds to the low winning jackpot result, the low winning / high winning jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result is specified.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the change from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written into the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main-side RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result. In step S508, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination process in step S506 is performed. “1” is set in the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a big win, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the change is obtained from the stop result table for outliers stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written into the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes of step S508 and step S509, a process of grasping the duration of game times is executed (step S510). In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation are the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result. If the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is not the result of any jackpot, but is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the game generation duration corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 Get the period. By the way, the duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

  It should be noted that the duration of the game times when no reach occurs is set such that the duration of the game times is shortened as the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area RE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, a shorter duration of game times is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the duration of the game times does not vary depending on the number of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the duration of game times when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a duration table may be set individually for each of the cases of outreach and non-reach outliers. In this case, distribution of the duration of game times according to each game result is performed.

  Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in a special figure special timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S511). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in a timer update process (step S310). By the way, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are carried out. In a state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a state where a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the final stop display is performed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). In this case, the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is a total time for one game time.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of game times. Here, as described above, the duration of game times acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the change command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound emission control device 81 can specify whether or not reach has occurred from information on the duration of game times. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. The type command includes game result information.

  When the sound emission control device 81 receives the change command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emission unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute effects for game times. In this case, the game round effect is performed in a manner corresponding to the contents of the change command and the type command. In addition, the symbol display device 41 displays a variation of the symbol as an effect for the game turn, and when the effect for the game turn ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process is obtained. Stopped display.

  Thereafter, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is started (step S513). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “0” when the special figure variation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. Thereafter, “1” is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that the game is started should be executed to the management IC 66.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S407, the special figure fluctuation process is executed. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display. If it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is regulated. The process for changing automatically is executed. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure changing process from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process. Update to stuff. In the present embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81.

  In step S408, a special figure finalizing process is executed. In the special figure determination process, the display form of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is set to a display form corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. Further, in the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”. When the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the special electric figure start process. Update.

  In step S409, a special electricity start process is executed. In the special electricity start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening / closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The voice light emission control device 81 receives the opening command so that the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute the opening effect. When the opening period has elapsed, a start process for starting the first round game is executed. In the start process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state and a round game end condition is set. In setting the end condition, an upper limit duration is set in the case where the special electric prize device 32 is kept open in the first round game of this time, and the special electric prize device 32 can be awarded in the first round game of this time. The upper limit number of game balls is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65.

  In step S410, a special electricity release process is executed. In the special electric release opening process, it is determined whether or not a round game end condition is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is closed. If the round game ended this time is not the last round game, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric release opening processing. If the round game ended this time is the last execution round game, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is added by 2 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric release open processing. Update to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination process.

  In step S411, a special electric power closing process is executed. In the special electricity closing process, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period elapses, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state and a round game end condition is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process.

  In step S412, special electric power end processing is executed. In the special electric power end process, when the process for starting the ending period in the current opening / closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The voice light emission control device 81 receives the ending command so that the display light emission unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute the ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time.

  Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, a signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

  In the entrance detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning port detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning port detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6 bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In this case, an HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Stores the information. That is, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected in the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, information “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In a detected state, information “1” corresponding to information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the entrance detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S602), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). . The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The 10 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and 10 prize balls are awarded. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a receives one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second output flag provided in the main-side RAM 65 (step S605), and the value of the ten award ball counter provided in the main-side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S608), and 1 is added to the value of the ten award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S609). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, “1” is set in the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S611), “1” is set in the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S612), and further The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special power prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special power prize device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special chart special power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the special power prize winning flag, so that one game ball enters the special power prize winning device 32. It is determined that a ball has been generated, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric prize device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electricity prize flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The 15 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to pay out 15 game balls. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, 15 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process in step S317 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), and 15 prize balls are received. When the command is output once, the counter value for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S615), and “1” is set to the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S616). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special signal special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The single prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the single prize ball counter is 1 or more, a single prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) and one prize ball is issued. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives a single prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S619), and “1” is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S620). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special signal special control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the second operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the ordinary power transmission control process (step S314) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag, so that the ordinary power stored in the general power reservation area 65c is stored. Processing for storing the current numerical information of the general utility release counter C4 in the general electric power reservation area 65c as general information holding information on condition that the number of reserved information on the side is less than the upper limit number of four Execute. It is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag in the ordinary power control process (step S314), and the gate winning flag is cleared to “0” when processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as already described, when one game ball is detected by one ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, In the situation where the detection of the one game ball is continued by the detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 specifies that one game ball has been detected by the entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. Done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

  Next, processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 and the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout-side ROM 93, a payout-side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to a payout-side CPU 92 that is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires a faster time for reading than the payout side ROM 93. The payout-side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout-side ROM 93.

  The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be normally paid out, and if the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball cannot be normally discharged, The payout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout limit command indicating that the payout is not normally possible to the main CPU63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform notification indicating that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally. In this manner, a notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out game balls, a full state where the lower plate 56a is filled with game balls, a state where no balls are refilled in the tank 75, a state where no balls are replenished, and a payout device 76 There are a payout abnormal state in which the machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is fully filled when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is determined that the full tank state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is not detected when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball detection sensor is released. Identifies that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and a detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor 76 does not continuously detect the game ball in spite of the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is determined that the payout abnormality state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95 and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is determined to be opened from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is changed from the opened state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has been closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state from the open state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when receiving a main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when receiving a main body closing command.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor. And a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a ball useless process is executed (step S702). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the no-ball state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality state is based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the payout abnormal state, the process of stopping payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating a payout abnormality state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95. When the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for allowing the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. If the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, Is executed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a command reading process is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out game balls. The payout control process for performing the execution control is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and one paying ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, external information setting processing for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing is executed (step S709).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, which are some external terminals and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97 as described above, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, the signal connection board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92 with regard to the configuration of this electrical connection. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout-side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. Thus, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  In detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 that branches from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also input to the external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round is completed. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the payout side CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the game ball payout in the pachinko machine 10. For example,
-A payout rate that is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10-A game play state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode Ball ratio (hereinafter referred to as “B”)
-Number of games played in the opening / closing execution mode-Number of games played in the high frequency support mode-Number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 "S")
B-S × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34”
-Number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”).
B- (S1 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + S2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
The occurrence probability of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time, the occurrence probability of the high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the like are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding entrance part.

<Configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing a game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. In addition to the above, the MPU 62 includes the I / F 101 and the reading terminal 68d described above.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting / receiving a signal to / from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. As a result of executing various processes by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side As a result of executing various processes by the CPU 63, when a command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It has. Each of these devices is connected to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and uses the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via the bidirectional communication signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be accessed at random, and when compared with the same data capacity, the management-side RAM 114 requires a faster time for reading than the management-side ROM 113. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date information) that is being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. It is a possible configuration. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used for storing information related to the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management-side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  The calculation result memory 131 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used for sequentially storing various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. “0” is stored as the first data when the signal is at the LOW level, and “1” information is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is output by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second prize opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is outputted by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, the second signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is outputted by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. HI level fourth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fifth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, the fifth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a seventh signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation that is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level when the high frequency support mode is set.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. And output.

  An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not a game is started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eleventh signal at the LOW level until the game turn is started, and outputs the eleventh signal at the HI level for a specific period when the game turn is started. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level eleventh signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  The fifteenth buffer 122o receives a set value update signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the main side CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the main-side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level set value update signal in a situation where a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not performed, and a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In addition, a pulse signal that maintains the set value update signal of the HI level over a specific period is output by the number corresponding to the newly set value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

  The sixteenth buffer 122p has an output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize when the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 68d. Entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  The twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n can be input with signals from the main CPU 63, but the pachinko machine 10 is blank to which normal signals are not input. As described above, by providing a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management I / F 111, It is possible to divert the management IC 66 to a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118l to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

  The setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 and receive an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management-side CPU 112 will be described later, when control is started in the main-side CPU 63 and the management-side CPU 112 with the start of the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the management-side CPU 112 changes from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command to In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the various types of signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. Information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence relationship memory 116 includes first to fourteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  In the first correspondence relationship area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included in the first correspondence area 123a together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. The second correspondence area 123b also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included along with information indicating that it is the general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fourth correspondence area 123d also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electricity prize device 32, as well as information indicating that the special electricity prize device 32 is present (15). Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first working port 33 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 together with information indicating the first operation port 33 in the fifth correspondence area 123e (one) ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second working port 34 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 together with information indicating the second operation port 34 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. In the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, information indicating the start of game times is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management CPU 112. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112.

  As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  In addition, every time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n on the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This is a configuration. As a result, in comparison with the configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n output a signal corresponding to the storage of the history information, The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

  The output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management CPU 112 is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Thereby, in the situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

  Information setting that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the 15th buffer 122o and the 16th buffer 122p are used for the set value update signal and the output instruction signal that are surely used not only for the pachinko machine 10 but also for other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. Therefore, it is possible to omit the process for specifying the type of the signal input to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each pointer information on a one-to-one basis. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it is necessary to store correspondence information according to signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k in the case of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date / time information measured in the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n, which is the information storage trigger this time, is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written.

  Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of the entrance portion corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As already described in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42 a to 44 a detect game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31. The first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a each store information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. When the buffer 122a to 122n that is the information storage trigger this time is any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is first to first. The information is read from any one of the seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball-entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the eighth buffer 122h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether or not the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input, and a signal indicating whether or not a game turn has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating the game times is stored in the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information together with the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the situation that is the high frequency support mode. The management CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information together with the history information storage area It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information. It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. However, it is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. The management CPU 112 is triggered to store the corresponding information in the history information storage area 125 both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Identifies That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game turn start timing is reached. When the game turn start timing is reached, the HI level eleventh signal is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management CPU 112 specifies that the game turn has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. In other words, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, information indicating that the game time is read from the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k is stored in the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days when game balls are continuously fired in the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for several minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 includes a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information of “0” as a write target is set in the pointer area 126. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the last-order pointer information is to be written, the pointer is set so that the pointer information “0” becomes the write-target. The information in the service area 126 is updated. As a result, when there is an opportunity to store history information exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  When the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, the history information storage area 125 is all cleared to “0” and the pointer information “0” is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information that has been read once from becoming read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  First, “14” is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The recognition output counter is a remaining information output for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 correspond to. Is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As described above, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are to be recognized as signal types, so “14” is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, an output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When this command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information. A command is output to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to .about.122n. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1 buffer becomes the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer, so as to correspond to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. The signal type recognition setting is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is “14” to “12”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “11”, the special electric prize is received. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is “10”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “9”, it is the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “8”, it is determined that the output port 24a is. If the recognition output counter is “7”, the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read, and the recognition output counter If “6”, the type identification command indicating the high-frequency support mode is read, and if the recognition output counter is “5”, the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If “4”, the type identification command indicating that the game is played is read, and if the recognition output counter is “3” to “1”, the type identification command indicating that it is blank is read.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Store information to be used.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S805), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S806). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (steps S803 and S803). Step S804).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S806: YES), an identification end command output process is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started in the main CPU 63. In the management process, the combination of processes after step S908 is executed 16 times or more before the process is started.

  First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). When the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), after the setting update recognition process is executed (step S902), the process returns to step S901. In the process for recognizing the setting update, details will be described later, but when the main CPU 63 performs a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, a corresponding process is executed.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122n that is the target of signal type setting. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S906).

  When a negative determination is made in step S904, or when the process of step S906 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 Run the process again.

  If an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processing from step S908 to step S910 is repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S908, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S909, although details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display output processing is executed. In step S910, as will be described in detail later, external output processing for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d is executed.

  FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122n are stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 24A shows a period in which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 24C shows the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals inputted to these buffers 122a to 122n. FIG. 24 (d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S905) is executed by the management CPU 112. FIG.

  By starting the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. The Also, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t2, which is the situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the above information. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management process (FIG. 23). Thereafter, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence relationship area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, the output of the type identification command is stopped at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timings t7 to t9, t10 to t12, t13 to t15, and t16 to t18, respectively, Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fourteenth type identification command is completed from the timing t16 to the timing t18.

  After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. In addition, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG.

  In order to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information, the management CPU 112 recognizes whether the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clearly shown to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It can be recognized.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, “11” is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management target to be specified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 items: presence / absence of execution of the opening / closing execution mode, presence / absence of execution of the high-frequency support mode, presence / absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14, and presence / absence of the start of game times. Therefore, first, “11” is set in the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S1002). If it is not the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 5 or more, so that the number of management targets corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven entrance detection sensors 42a. To 48a is specified (step S1003).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is “11” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is “9” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the management target counter is “8”. In the case of corresponding to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the management target counter is “7”, and the first working port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to “5”, the fifth output flag is set to “1”. It is determined whether or not it is set. If the value of the management target counter is “6” and corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a, whether or not “6” is set to the sixth output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. Note that “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15) as already described.

  When “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S1005). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S1006).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “4”, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “3”, the value is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “2”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened, and the management target counter When the value is “1”, it is determined whether or not the game turn is started by determining whether or not “1” is set in the eleventh output flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). When the value of the management target counter is “1” and the process of step S1008 is executed, the eleventh output flag is cleared to “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or “1” and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of game times, the first to seventh signals In addition, it is determined whether or not the HI output duration period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the eleventh signals has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. If the value of the management target counter is “4” and the current management target is the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “3”. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended. The value of the management target counter is “2” and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

  When a negative determination is made at step S1004, when a process at step S1006 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1007, when a process at step S1008 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1009, or step When the processing of S1010 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the management target counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1012). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processing after step S1002 is executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in a confirmation target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123k as already described, in step S1101, "11" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122n are numerical value confirmation targets. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh buffer 122k is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is an opening / closing execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above In addition to the correspondence information, start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n are targets for reading the corresponding relationship information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k is a target for reading the corresponding relationship information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth corresponding relationship area 123e is the corresponding relationship. Information is to be read out.

  By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the check target counter is any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the game times. Is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second A combination of the operation relationship 34 and the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the game times is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. And the combination of the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1105). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the processing of step S1105 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode is displayed in the corresponding relationship areas 123h to 123j. Since either the information indicating the presence or the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read (step S1108) in the same manner as in step S1103, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. In the history information storage area 125, the combination of the RTC information, the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state. Thereafter, the update processing of the target pointer is executed in the same manner as in step S1105 (step S1110).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1106, a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the processing in step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1112). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the processing after step S1102 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27A shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and FIG. 27B shows the HI level to the eighth buffer 122h. 27 (c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27 (d) shows a HI level signal at the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 27E shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 27A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 27A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not a history information storage target, the t2 As shown in FIG. 27E, the history information is not written at the timing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each timing as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the timing t4 when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the open / close execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing at time t8 when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high frequency support mode by confirming the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Accordingly, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also in the high frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the timing t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is in the state where the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, the output process of the set value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a setting value update signal output process executed by the main CPU 63. The set value update signal output process is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As already described, the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the output process of the set value update signal is a process for causing the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main process (FIG. 9). It is executed at a timing before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, since the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the setting value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the process is executed, it is possible to specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the management CPU 112 is a set value update signal.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1203), and whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”. Is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period while a plurality of pulses at which the set value update signal becomes the HI level is output. It is. When the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. Setting is made (step S1205).

  Thereafter, “20” is set in the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 with a period of about 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  When the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S1208). When the value of the HI level counter is “0” (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. Setting is performed (step S1209).

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pulse number counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1210), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pulse number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1211). When the value of the pulse number counter is not “0” (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. In order to mean that there is no, “20” is set in the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 with a period of about 10 microseconds, it is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. This maintenance period of the LOW level is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the value of the pulse number counter is “0” (step S1211: YES), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Therefore, the setting value identification end command output process is executed (step S1213). The set value identification end command is a command for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output of the set value update signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. When the set value identification end command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same manner as the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command.

  As described above, in the output process of the set value update signal, a pulse signal by the set value update signal corresponding to the set value value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of the supply of the current operating power is output to the management IC 66. To do. The management-side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process, thereby grasping the number of pulse signals by the set value update signal, and grasping the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on the number.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  It is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to “1” (step S1302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1303, or when the process of step S1304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information that is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1308). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  When the setting update recognition process is executed as described above and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the A combination of setting values when setting is performed is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Thus, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting are changed. It is possible to grasp the contents of the set values when performed.

  Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Thereby, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted, and various parameters to be described later are timings for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It is calculated using the history information that exists between before and after. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is stored in the history memory 117 as described above, the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d and stored in the history memory 117. By reading the information, it is possible to calculate various parameters in a period after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during which the setting state is maintained.

  Next, display output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, it is determined whether it is a calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have elapsed since the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 has started, or if 51 seconds have elapsed since the previous determination in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the number of various incoming balls at normal times is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the outlets 24a in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored, Calculate the number of balls entered. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the general winning opening 31. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special power prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the special power prize winning device 32. Calculate the number. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of balls entered. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of balls entered.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 An outlet that occurs in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in a period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are calculated (step S1403). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1402 and step S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entrances generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of entrances calculated in step S1402. And the following 1st-8th parameters are calculated using the number of each incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of entered balls K1, and the entrance to the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1402 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K2 of balls received, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1402. The difference in the number of incoming balls of 32 is defined as the number of incoming balls K3, and the difference in the number of incoming balls of the first working port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402 is entered. The number K4 is the second number calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402. The difference between the ball entrance number of Doguchi 34 and ball entrance number K5.
First parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “first operating port 33 The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the work area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) D1 ”)
Second parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K2 entering the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32. The total number of balls K3 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Fourth parameter: the total number K4 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K5 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1- (D2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Step S1404 Which stores the first to eighth parameter is the operation result to the normal storage area for the time of the operation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are overwritten.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the switching execution mode, and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 generated in the state of the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1405). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start / close execution mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. When correspondence information and end information indicating that it is in the opening / closing execution mode are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the like that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period is the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1405. Then, the following 11th to 18th parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1405 is set as the number of entered balls K11, and the entry of the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1405 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered at the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls entered, and the special prize device calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1405. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is entered. The number K14 is calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “first operating port 33 The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) D11 ”)
The twelfth parameter: the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) The thirteenth parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32 The total number of balls K13 / the ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA. Fourteenth parameter: the total number K14 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K15 entering the second operating port 34 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
16th parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
17th parameter: (K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout of game balls (K12 × “general The number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 "+ K13 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32 "+ K14 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+ K15 ×" the second operating port 34 ". Ratio / 18th parameter: K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K13 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” ") In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for the open / close execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the next step S1407 is executed and the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area. The previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the open / close execution mode are overwritten.

  Thereafter, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. The out port 24a generated in the situation of the high frequency support mode by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 117 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information and start information indicating the high frequency support mode, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode, and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the high frequency support mode When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the end information are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as being in the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, and the first operating port 33, which are generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the entry of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1408 is performed. The difference in the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is set as the number K22 of balls, and the special prize apparatus calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1408. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408 is entered. The number is K24 and is calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K24 × “first operating port 33” The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K25 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 23rd parameter: Game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Total number of entered balls K23 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). Twenty-fourth parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the first working port 33 K24 / discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K25 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high frequency support mode storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high frequency support mode storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, the opening / closing execution mode is obtained by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of occurrences of is calculated. In addition, the number of occurrences of game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game times are started in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode is the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of the game times is the number of occurrences K32.
-31st parameter: K31 / K32
In step S1411, the thirty-first parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the opening / closing execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1411 is executed and the thirty-first parameter is calculated, the newly calculated thirty-first parameter is stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area, so that the open / close execution mode is maintained until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the high frequency Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. In addition, the number of occurrences of game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game times are started in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode are calculated. The occurrence frequency of the high frequency support mode is set as the occurrence count K41, the occurrence count of the game times is set as the occurrence count K42, and the occurrence count of the opening / closing execution mode calculated in step S1411 is set as the occurrence count K43.
-41st parameter: K41 / K42
-42nd parameter: K41 / K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are calculation results, are stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process of step S1412 is executed, a display process is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display process.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the management result of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management-side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, whereby the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, and the thirty-first parameter. Parameters and calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Further, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, a number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and a number corresponding to the first digit is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. And in the 1st-3rd information display apparatus 69a-69c, the said 1st-8th parameter, the said 11th-18th parameter, the said 21st-26th parameter, the said 31st parameter, and the said 41st-41st The display corresponding to the calculation result of the forty-second parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter that is the display target in the last order is displayed, the display that is the display target in the first order. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the above various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

  When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after “1” subtraction is “0”. It is determined whether or not the timing is reached (step S1502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S1504: YES), the display target counter value is cleared to “0” (step S1505).

  The display target counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter that is the display target in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, the thirty-first to forty-second parameters, and display target counters “0” to “24”. There is a one-to-one correspondence with possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter that is the first display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. If so, the forty-second parameter that is the last display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1504, or when the process of step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. Control is performed (step S1506). In addition, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the 1's place is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in step S1506 and step S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. The Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

  When supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Is done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main body 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is done regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, and thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.69c.

  The display of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the operation power supply to the management CPU 112 is started and the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Is done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is displayed.

  When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the setting value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the information corresponding to the set value is displayed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management result display is started after the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. Thus, even if the third notification display device 69c is configured to be used as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and displaying the management result of the game history, the display of these displays is also possible. It is possible to avoid overlapping the periods.

  When information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the management result of the game history is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of information corresponding to the set value and the display of the management result of the game history is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  In the data output processing, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. Thus, in order to perform external output of history information and various parameters, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. It is necessary to. Since the power switch for stopping and starting the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is provided in the payout mechanism 73 mounted on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, these stop and start operations are performed. In order to do this, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to externally output history information and various parameters, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. By adopting a configuration that needs to be configured, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for reading history information and various parameters by anyone other than the administrator of the game hall.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 68d, so that the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is determined by the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S1602). The external device is configured to allow both confirmation of control information and history information and various parameters, and if control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the external device, the external device A control information confirmation signal is transmitted, and when history information and confirmation of various parameters are selected by a manual operation on the external apparatus, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the external apparatus. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an external device for confirming control information may be configured separately from an external device for confirming history. In this case, when an external device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the external device, and an external for history confirmation is transmitted to the reading terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the external device.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, output processing for control information confirmation is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to read the control information in the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it is confirmed whether the control information is normal or normal. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32B, the management CPU 112 has changed the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level. (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the game history management result information can be analyzed. Further, when the history information is output to the reading terminal 68d, the management CPU 112 clears the history memory 117 to “0” (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is deleted only when the history information is read by the external device.

  Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32A), when the process of step S1603 is executed, or when the process of step S1604 is executed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d continues. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S1605). If it is continued (step S1605: YES), the process stands by in step S1605. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), the data output process is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since a game ball is paid out when a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the player can either The game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as a history target entering unit). When this occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part in the pachinko machine 10, and use this managed information. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to each history target entrance section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the history information.

  All the entrances that discharge the game balls from the game area PA are the targets for executing the history information storage process and the targets for management using the history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the pitching frequency for an arbitrary history target pitching part using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target entrance part with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball has entered the history target entrance portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target entry part, but also history information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, and the high frequency support mode History information indicating whether or not, and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Thereby, it is possible to manage whether or not the game balls have entered the history target ball entering unit by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to an external device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the history information is read by the external device, and it is possible to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target entry portion using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. As a result, the history information can be output to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is a program or history information, and information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, only necessary information can be read out even if the reading terminal 68d is also used.

  Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified which information of the program and the history information is to be output from the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration relating to selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for storing a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminals 68d can be collected in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

  The main CPU 63 that executes processing for paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Separately, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game balls enter the respective history target entrance portions while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 on the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main-side CPU 63 uses information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a using the signal paths corresponding to the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information on the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  Information corresponding to whether or not the main CPU 63 is in the opening / closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened, Information corresponding to the start of the game round is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using a signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, the signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to the management CPU 112. Thereby, it is not necessary to store the corresponding relationship information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target entrance part, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entrance part can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding communication compared with the structure which provides the dedicated signal path | route for transmitting corresponding relationship information.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, information that enables the management target IC 66 to specify the history target entrance portion corresponding to the transmission target information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 each time detection result information of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with more buffers than the types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It has been. Thereby, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, correspondence information indicating the type of the history target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the entrance mode of the game ball into each history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh parameter) corresponding to the game ball entering mode of the game area PA in a predetermined period are used. To 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. The various parameters resulting from the calculation are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it is possible to notify the pachinko machine 10 of various parameters as a result of calculation using the history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to each of the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode are calculated. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the entrance mode of the game ball according to each situation.

  When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to an external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes an object to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. Can be made difficult to occur.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is generated through the external terminal plate 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . Thus, by using information output externally through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of entering the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Thereby, even if it is the single pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to produce the situation which becomes advantageous or unfavorable about the probability of being a jackpot result in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is set in the pachinko machine 10. Does not vary according to conditions. Thereby, it becomes possible to restrict the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of the jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since the high-accuracy determination table 64g referred to in the high-probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the determination tables 64a to 64g are stored in advance in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the sort mode of the type of jackpot result is the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Does not fluctuate accordingly. Thereby, it becomes possible to restrict the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since the distribution table 64h referred to when distributing the types of jackpot results can be made common in any of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 can be used. Can be prevented from increasing in storage capacity.

  Even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased. As a result, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information up to that time can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory can be stored for a long period of time. The management result of the game history can be specified using the history information accumulated in 117.

  Even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, and the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Is performed, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the history information after the setting.

  When history information corresponding to the history information is stored in the history memory 117 by newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. As a result, it is possible to identify the contents of the set values set in the past by referring to the history information.

  When calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is used based on the history information corresponding to the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 setting. Thus, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed can be derived as various parameters.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and based on history information corresponding to a change in the setting value is used as a reference. Alternatively, various parameters may be calculated using history information stored after that. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed can be derived as various parameters.

  In addition, although the opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d is provided in the board box 60a of the main controller 60, the opening 69 is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is opposed to the opposing wall 60b. It is good also as a structure covered with. In this case, in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the success / failure table corresponding to the set state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 has a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area. 166 are provided. In the setting 1 area 161, the low probability table 161 a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high-probability table 161b for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state is “setting 1” and the winning-and-raising lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 2 area 162 includes a low probability table 162a for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high probability determination table 162b for setting 2, which is referred to when the setting state of “Setting 2” is “high probability mode”. In the setting 3 area 163, a low probability table 163a for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high-probability table 163b for setting 3, which is referred to when the setting state is “setting 3” and the winning-and-raising lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  In the setting 4 area 164, a low probability table 164a for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high probability determination table 164b for setting 4, which is referred to when the setting state of “setting 4” is “high probability mode”. In the setting 5 area 165, the low probability table 165a for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in the high-probability table 165b for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state is “setting 5” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the setting 6 area 166, a low probability table 166a for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 Is stored in a high-probability table 166b for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state is “setting 6” and the winning / non-winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low probability tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low probability table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/320, and when the low probability table 162a for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/310. If the low probability table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/300, and if the low probability table 164a for setting 4 is referenced, it is about 1/290. A big hit result is obtained, and if the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, the big hit result is about 1/280, and if the low probability table 166a for setting 6 is referenced, it is about 1/270. A jackpot result. As a result, if the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high set value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous to the player.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in the high-accuracy determination tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high-accuracy determination table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high-accuracy determination table 162b for setting 2 is referred to, it is about 1/40. If the high-decision result table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/35, and if the high-probability table 164b for setting 4 is referenced, it is about 1/30. A big hit result is obtained, and when the high probability determination table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/25, and when the high probability determination table 166b for setting 6 is referred to, it is about 1/20. A jackpot result. Thereby, it is easier for the jackpot result to occur in the high probability mode when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode becomes higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is “Setting 1”. In the present embodiment, both of the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are the same. The setting state of the machine 10 is higher as the setting value is higher. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage over the setting of a high setting value.

  Even if the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode in the case of “setting 6” which is the highest setting state, the winning result of the jackpot result in the high probability mode in the case of “setting 1” which is the lowest setting state It is set lower than the probability. This makes it possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting”. It is possible to prevent the player's advantage in the case of “6” from becoming extremely high.

  On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and a storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher in the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. A configuration in which the set value is lower may be employed. In this case, in the low probability mode, a higher setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is advantageous to the player, and in the high probability mode, a lower setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is advantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a higher setting value, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. It is good also as a structure which is constant in the setting state of "." In this case, in the high probability mode, the higher the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous for the player. In the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the set state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring. Become.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the management of game history management results when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In addition to the memories in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing.

  The separate storage memory 171 includes a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. In the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, information on the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, the first embodiment described above. The various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) described in the above are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, first, various parameters are stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the nth The areas to be stored are switched so that the storage areas 172 to 176 → the (n + 1) th separate storage areas 172 to 176. When various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176 and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are deleted. As a result, various parameters until the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased for more than five times. It is memorized.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the setting update recognition process in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to “1”. Setting is performed (step S1802). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1803, or when the process of step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, a monitoring process for repeated changes is executed (step S1806). Although details will be described later in the repeated change monitoring process, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly generated in a short period, a process for notifying it is executed. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended Therefore, it is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time to be erased. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed.

  Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S1807). In various arithmetic processes, the processes in steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Accordingly, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, first to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameter, and thirty-first parameter) using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To 42nd parameter) is calculated.

  Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for enabling the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that the storage target is changed to the next sequential area when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. Updated to By executing the processing in step S1808, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” (step S1809). That is, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1812). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was previously set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was last set is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game times is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, 1 is added to the value of the repeated change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, as described above, it is not necessary to supply external power for storing and holding the value of the repeated change counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening execution of game times exceeding the reference number is the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, a repeated change display process is executed (step S1904). In the repeated change display processing, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being repeated a number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. Display content of repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is a display content that displays “E” in all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. The state in which the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to “0”. . The repeated change flag is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of the repeated change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. When the repeated change flag is set to “1” and the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing in the first embodiment is performed. (FIG. 31) is not executed. Thereafter, “1” is set to the repeated change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeated change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to “0” (step S1906). Thereafter, on the condition that “1” is set in the repeated change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeated change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are displayed. The display is terminated (step S1908), and the repeated change flag is cleared to “0” (step S1909).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted. As a result, it is possible to leave history information about the game executed after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the history memory 117.

  When a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even when the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history based on the history information to be deleted. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored in separate storage memories. 171 is stored. Thereby, even if a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timings of the setting states for a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods with reference to the timing when the new setting state is set. In addition, even when a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated in a situation where no game is played, various parameters calculated using history information of the situation where the game is actually played are The possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171 can be increased.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended Therefore, it is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time to be erased. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the administrator or the like that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  Notification that the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period is performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history, the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time. Notification can be performed.

  In a situation where it should be notified that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change continue to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The notification of the management result of the normal game history is not performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it becomes possible to emphasize the notification that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In the case where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the game area PA after a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is not limited to this. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, when the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined entry part (for example, one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined In a situation where the total number of game balls discharged into the combination) is within the reference number, and the event where the new setting is made continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, an event that the new setting is performed in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the reference value is executed when the reference value is exceeded.

  In addition, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed exceeding a notification reference value within a monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), a notification corresponding thereto may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value However, the setting value has been changed in a situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number of times. When an event continues beyond the notification reference value, a corresponding notification may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value The corresponding notification is executed, but the new setting is triggered when the number of game times executed after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number of times. It is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting corresponding to it is performed when the event by which the various parameters made above continue exceeding the alerting | reporting reference value.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value However, in addition to or in place of it, the progress of the game may be limited for a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour).

<Fourth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the monitoring process for repeated changes is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the repeated change monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63. The repeated change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the monitoring process for repeated change is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which repeated change monitoring processing is executed when a set value is changed may be employed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was previously set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for measuring the number of game times executed after the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main CPU 63 executes a new game number. Each time, the value of the game number counter is incremented by one. The game number counter is excluded from the “0” clearing target even when the clear process (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repetitive change counter is excluded from the “0” clearing target even when the clear processing (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening execution of game times exceeding the reference number is the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, "1" is set to the repeated change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repeated change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the repeated change notification should be notified. The repeated change flag is excluded from the “0” clearing target even when the clear processing (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S2005). Thereafter, on condition that “1” is set in the repeat change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to “0” (step S2007).

  In the repeated change monitoring process, when “1” is set in the repeated change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2008: YES), a repeated change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the repeated change notification command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting portion 53, and the speaker portion 54 are notified of the repeated change. The notification of the repetitive change is continued until the supply of operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not required even if the gaming machine body 12 is not opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible for the administrator to recognize that the new setting has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which a notification command for repeated change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81 when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, A configuration may be employed in which external output corresponding to that is performed.

  The main CPU 63 may execute the repeated change monitoring process according to the present embodiment, and the management CPU 112 may execute the repeated change monitoring process according to the third embodiment. Thereby, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether or not the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition process in the management side CPU 112 is different from that in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to “1”. It sets (step S2102). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2103 or when the process of step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals inputted to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and further, it is determined whether or not the grasped number of game times exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game balls are discharged from the game area PA is stored is a reference number (specifically, 1000). It is good also as a structure which determines whether it is over in step S2106. Corresponding relationship information indicating that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entering portion (for example, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined combination). In step S2106, it may be determined whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 storing the number exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not the total reference number of history information stored in the history memory 117 (specifically, 1000) is exceeded in step S2106.

  In the case where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the game area PA after a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is not limited to this. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, when the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined entry part (for example, one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined In a situation where the total number of game balls discharged into the combination) is within the reference number, and the event where the new setting is made continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, an event that the new setting is performed in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the reference value is executed when the reference value is exceeded.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processes, the processes in steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Accordingly, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, first to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameter, and thirty-first parameter) using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To 42nd parameter) is calculated.

  Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for enabling the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that the storage target is changed to the next sequential area when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. Updated to By executing the processing of step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” (step S2109). That is, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2112). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is stored in the history memory 117 on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly set in a short period of time, the information on the management result of the game history as a result of the game being substantially played is stored in the separate storage memory 171. It can be stored.

  Note that the process of step S2109 may be executed on condition that the processes of step S2107 and step S2108 have been executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Thereby, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly set in a short period, the history information in the history memory 117 can be prevented from being deleted.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141f to 144f of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of the respective areas 141 to 144.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to eleventh corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set to the check target counter in step S2201.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, as the corresponding relationship information, information indicating that it is an open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

  If a positive determination is made in step S2202, state information setting processing is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in operation is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in operation is stored in the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management-side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2202, or when the process of step S2203 is executed, numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is displayed. , It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether or not it has been changed from “0” to “1” ( Step S2204). If the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is a value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information on the first state is stored in the management RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1” in the situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information on the second state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information on the third state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S2205). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n for summation in the summation area 141 of the history memory 117 is added. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 141k for summation is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 141e for summation is an addition target. If the value of the check target counter is “1”, the total first counter 141a is an addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter processing for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to first counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is set. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 142a for the first state is the addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the status information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding second state counter addition processing is executed (step S2209). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is set. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 143a for the second state is the addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding third state counter addition process is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is set. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is the addition target.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process in step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  When the history setting process is executed as described above, the number of game balls that enter the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the opening and closing are executed. The number of occurrences of the mode, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode, and the number of occurrences of the game times are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment but are stored as number information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  As described above, since it is stored as the number information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to execute a process for deriving the number information from the history information when calculating various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Next, setting update recognition processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to “1”. Setting is performed (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2303, or when the process of step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 2305, the summation eleventh counter 141 k measuring the number of game times executed in the summation area 141 in the history memory 117 and the opening / closing execution in the summation area 141 in the history memory 117. Each of the eighth counter 141h for counting the number of occurrences of the mode and the ninth counter 141i for totaling the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the summing area 141 in the history memory 117 “0” is cleared (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, the number of game times, the number of times of opening / closing execution mode, and the number of times of high-frequency support mode are cleared to “0” when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Is done. Accordingly, the thirty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time, the forty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high-frequency support mode for the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. As a result, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memory 117 has counters other than the total eighth counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k. “0” is not cleared. Thereby, the management of the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the number of game balls that enter the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode, and the high frequency support The number of occurrences of the mode and the number of occurrences of the game times are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number of times information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  Further, since the configuration is such that the number information is stored instead of the history information, it is not necessary to execute a process for deriving the number information from the history information when calculating various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Information about the number of game times, the number of times of opening / closing execution mode, and the number of times of occurrence of high-frequency support mode is cleared to “0” when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Accordingly, the thirty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game time, the forty-first parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high-frequency support mode for the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. As a result, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memory 117 has counters other than the total eighth counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k. “0” is not cleared. Thereby, the management of the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  The configuration of the history memory 117 as in the present embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after the present embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to “0”.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the process of step S2306-step S2308 is performed in the process for a setting update recognition (FIG. 41) when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. As a result, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, if the setting value is not changed before and after that, information on the number of executions of the game times, information on the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode, and high frequency support The information on the number of occurrences of the mode is not cleared to “0”, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information on the number of executions of the game times, the information on the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode, and the high frequency support mode It is possible to clear the information on the number of occurrences of “0”.

  In the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, which are the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to “setting 1”, and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to “setting 2”. A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided in correspondence with “setting 3”, and a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided in correspondence with “setting 4”, corresponding to “setting 5”. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to “setting 6”.

  Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to store history information corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting has been performed are stored as history information. The history information can be stored separately for each set value without deleting the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  In addition, in each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment are used. It is good also as a structure by which these combinations are set.

  Next, the setting update recognition process in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to “1” (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”. In the present embodiment, since the set value grasping counter is provided in the calculation result memory 131 which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. Also, the value stored in the set value grasping counter is stored and held.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2403, or when the process of step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the set value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 are set as the history information storage targets and the reference targets when calculating various parameters ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “1”, it means that it has been set to “setting 1”. Therefore, the history memory 181 for setting 1 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference object during calculation. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “2”, it means that it is set to “setting 2”. Therefore, the history memory 182 for setting 2 is stored in the history information storage target and when various parameters are calculated. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “3”, it means that it has been set to “setting 3”. Therefore, the history memory 183 for setting 3 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “4”, it means that it has been set to “setting 4”. Therefore, the history memory 184 for setting 4 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “5”, it means that it has been set to “setting 5”. Therefore, the history memory 185 for setting 5 is stored in the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “6”, it means that it has been set to “setting 6”. Therefore, the history memory 186 for setting 6 is stored in the storage target of history information and various parameters are calculated. Set as a reference target.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 that are the storage targets, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified and becomes the write target. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information. Further, information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2409). In the update process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are stored. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided as the history memory 117 so as to correspond to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, respectively. Thereby, it becomes possible to store the game history corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting has been performed are stored as history information. The history information can be stored separately for each set value without deleting the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the six memories 1 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided, and one memory is used for the setting 1 Corresponding to the history memory 181 for the second setting, an area corresponding to the history memory 182 for the setting 2, an area corresponding to the history memory 183 for the setting 3, and a history memory 184 for the setting 4. An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where history information is stored using one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. If the history information is stored, the history information in the one history memory 191 or 192 is not deleted until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 or 192. The history information can be newly stored in both the history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 and 192. Become.

  Next, the setting update recognition process in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to “ 1 "(step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”. If the value of the setting value grasping counter is “6”, it means “setting 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasp counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2503, or when the process of step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, "1" is set to the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as the history information storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 until after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify whether not only the history memory 191 and 192 but also the other history memory 191 and 192 is a target for storing history information. In addition, since a setting change generation flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, setting change occurs even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value stored in the flag is stored and held.

  Thereafter, RTC information which is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, the writing process to each of the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is not set to “1” (step S2601: NO), the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are set to the storage target side. Only the history information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are currently stored are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag. When the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the first history memory 191 is a storage target, and the value of the storage target flag is “1”. In this case, the second history memory 192 is to be stored. The storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, so even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag The value of is stored.

  Thereafter, a history setting execution process is executed for the memory for history 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the process from step S1101 to step S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed on one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: YES), the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are stored. This means that the history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes in steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, the processing of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed on the second history memory 192. Thereby, history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

  When the process of step S2603 is executed, or when the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories exist in the non-memory target history memories 191 and 192 (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is a storage target, so the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not the history information indicating that the game ball has been discharged from is stored a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more. Further, when the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, the second history memory 192 is a storage target, and therefore, the game ball from the game area PA to the first history memory 191. It is determined whether or not the history information indicating that has been discharged is stored a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more. In addition, it is not determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) of history information indicating that game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is stored, but game times have been executed. It is good also as a structure which determines whether the log | history information which shows is stored more than predetermined number (specifically "100").

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage target change process is executed (step S2607). In the process of changing the storage target, the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is set to a value different from the current value between the two values, whereby the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 Change the side to be stored. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to “1”. If the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to “0”. As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information regarding the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed are set as storage targets. Then, various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192 that are newly stored, and are executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. It is possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

  After that, a clear process is executed on the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that have been stored until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the second history memory 192 is cleared to “0”, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the first history memory 191 is set to “ Clear “0”. Thereafter, the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to “0” (step S2609).

  Next, display output processing in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the storage side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is grasped as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the second The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the memory histories 191 and 192 to be stored grasped in step S2702. As a result, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. The result is stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1”. Even if there are, various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process of step S2703 is executed, a display process is executed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, While the history memories 191 and 192 that have been stored are directly stored, history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not stored. Then, when a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the discharge of game balls from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that is not the storage target, it is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are directly stored, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that have been stored until then are cleared to “0”. Thereby, when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of the game performed at the newly set value. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period so as not to appropriately calculate various parameters, The memories 191 and 192 are maintained without being changed. Thereby, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history so far.

  The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the two memories of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided, and the first history is stored in one memory. The first history area corresponding to the storage memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 may be set.

  Further, only one history memory 117 may be provided. In this case, a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds a predetermined number after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which history information before the timing at which the information is released is erased, and history information after the timing at which the setting is made is stored and retained without being erased. Thereby, the history before the timing when the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set at the timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Information can be erased. Further, the history information corresponding to the history information is stored in the history memory 117 at the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, so that the new setting state is set in the history memory 117. It is possible to distinguish between history information before and after the timing at which is performed.

  In addition, the timing of erasing the history information is limited to a case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. Alternatively, the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 may be a predetermined number or more.

  Further, even when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, if the setting value is not changed before and after that, the change of the history memory 191 and 192 as described above and the history information are changed. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting value is changed before and after the setting, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above are not erased. The change and the deletion of the history information may be performed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of buffer that has been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the type of buffer that is described above. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p is instructed to output. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, a signal corresponding to the start of the game turn is input as the eleventh buffer to the eleventh buffer 122k, and the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer. However, in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as a game round signal, a set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is in the opening / closing execution mode. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a high frequency support mode signal, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal. Input to the buffer 122o.

  The game turn signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, the open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n is input It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode signal is input, the door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. Thus, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the 11th to 16th buffers 122k to 122p are input. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9), as in the first embodiment.

  First, “10”, which is the number of first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). Thereafter, an output process of an identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output processing, output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level to start outputting the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  After that, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in an output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output count of the type identification signal.

  In the present embodiment, when the management CPU 112 recognizes the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of winning balls set for the pitching portion corresponding to the type of signal. The type identification signal is output the same number of times. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times of receiving the type identification signal for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the pitching part corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S2803, when the value of the recognition output counter is “10”, “9”, or “8”, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the output counter for recognition is “7”, “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electricity prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “5”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is “4”, since the game ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the output counter Set “0” to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of “3” to “1”, there is no corresponding entrance portion and it is blank, so “0” is set in the output number counter.

  Thereafter, a start trigger signal output process is executed (step S2804). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is not “0” (step S2805: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2803. The process proceeds to step S2806. In step S2806, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2808). When the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, an output process of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In this output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2810), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2811: YES), an identification end signal output process is executed (step S2812). In the output process, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process of step S2901 is executed again. The processing contents of the setting update recognition processing are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  When reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S2903). Thereafter, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether a type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S2905: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2906). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2905 or when the process of step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905. If the end trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, the reception number counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 among the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that is being stored. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first corresponding relationship area 123a, the second corresponding relationship area 123b, and the third corresponding relationship area 123c, and the fourth corresponding relationship area 123d. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. In the area 123f, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth corresponding relation areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management-side RAM 114 (step S2909).

  When a negative determination is made in step S2904, or when the process of step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and the processing after step S2905 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES). Run. If reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2910: YES), the history setting process in step S2911, the display output process in step S2912, and the external output process in step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 51A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates a period in which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51 (d) indicates a period in which the output state of the signal in the opening / closing execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. The period during which the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at the HI level is shown, and FIG. 51 (f) shows the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed, FIG. 51 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S2908) shows a timing of the execution of.

  As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIG. 51A, FIG. 51D, and FIG. The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output state of the first signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management process (FIG. 50) to enter the identification state as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51A from the timing t3 to the timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51 (b) from the timing t5 to the timing t7. Thus, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51C from the timing t8 to the timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “1” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 j in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51A from the timing t11 to the timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), each of timing t13 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t18, timing t19 to timing t21, and timing t22 to timing t24 is shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 as shown in FIG. 51 (g) at the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51 (c) from the timing t25 to the timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “10” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123j in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c), 51 (d), and 51 (e), the output state of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is LOW. Change from level to HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output state of the third signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes a prize ball corresponding to the entry part that triggered the storage of the history information. Number information is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of pitched portions having the same number of winning balls, the pitched portions cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 each have one winning ball, it is possible to distinguish the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 may be different. Thereby, even if it is the structure where history information like this embodiment is stored, it becomes possible to distinguish the 1st operation port 33 and the 2nd operation port 34 in history information.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game round has been started, information corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed and the information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened, the main CPU 63 indicates that the signal path corresponds to the information. Even if the corresponding relationship information is not received, the management CPU 112 can specify the correspondence information. In this case, only information corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is information that requires the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118j from the main CPU 63. Become. When the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of winning balls corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing information on each entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of signal paths for allowing the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42 a to 48 a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second prize winning port detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. In addition, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above-described configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without any processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the respective winning results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch location and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act of inputting an abnormal entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display device for displaying the game history management result is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the main controller 60 in the present embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c. However, in the present embodiment, the first notification display device 69b is provided. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

  Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but is not limited to this, and is a single multicolor light emitting type. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is installed such that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and by the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparently, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 accommodated in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are provided through the opposing wall portion 60b. The display surface of ~ 204 can be visually observed.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers are displayed in the range of “0” to “9”. The management result of the game history is notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the management result of the game history that is the notification target (the first to eighth parameters in the first embodiment, the first to the eighteenth parameters). Display corresponding to the types of parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters), and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are subject to notification. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the type of game history is performed.

  Specifically, as the types of game history management results, the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the thirty-first to forty-second parameters in the first embodiment. Is present. In the first notification display device 201, display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified is performed. Specifically, when any one of the first to eighth parameters is a notification target, “A” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and any one of the first to eighteenth parameters is displayed. When it is a notification target, “E” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and when any of the 21st to 26th parameters is a notification target, the first notification display device is displayed. When “H” is displayed at 201 and any of the 31st parameters is a notification target, “L” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. If it is the target, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

  The second notification display device 202 displays the order corresponding to the type of management result of the game history that is the notification target, among the arrangement order of the management results of the game history in the parameter group that is the notification target. The parameter group of the first to eighth parameters will be described as an example. When the first parameter is a notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is When it is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the third parameter is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed, “4” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the fourth parameter is a notification target, and when the fifth parameter is a notification target, When “5” is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is a notification target, “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the seventh parameter is a notification target. If there is a second notification display device 202 "7" is displayed Te, when the eighth parameter is a notification target "8" is displayed in the second notification for the display device 202. Further, the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters will be described as an example. When the 21st parameter is a notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the 22nd parameter is displayed. When the parameter is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. When the parameter is a notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. 3 ”is displayed, and when the 24th parameter is a notification target,“ 4 ”is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 25th parameter is a notification target, When “5” is displayed on the notification display device 202 and the 26th parameter is a notification target, “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202.

  In detail about the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number corresponding to the tenth digit is the third notification value among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100. A number displayed on the display device 203 and corresponding to the first digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter that is the display target in the last order is displayed, the first parameter that is the display target in the first order The calculation result of is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 become notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, not only the notification of the management result of the game history but also the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed as in the first embodiment. In, a value corresponding to the current set value is displayed. Specifically, while the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off in the changeable state, the first to fourth notification display devices 204 arranged side by side exist at the right end. On the fourth notification display device 204, the value corresponding to the current set value is displayed. That is, when “setting 1” is selected in the changeable state, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 2” is selected in the changeable state. When “2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and “setting 3” is selected in the changeable state, “3” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and can be changed. When “setting 4” is selected in the state, “4” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 5” is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification is displayed. When “5” is displayed on the display device 204 and “setting 6” is selected in the changeable state, “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62.

  As described above, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207, and a fourth display IC 208.

  The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 through the signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display The segment light emission control is performed. When the operating power is supplied, the first display IC 205 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the first notification display device. 201 is continuously displayed. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the first display IC 205 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, a light off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the first display IC 205, the display is performed on the first display IC 205. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped The first notification display device 201 is started.

  The second display IC 206 is provided in correspondence with the second notification display device 202, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL33 and electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through the signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display The segment light emission control is performed. The second display IC 206 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the second notification display device. 202 is continuously displayed. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the second display IC 206 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the second display IC 206, the display is performed on the second display IC 206. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped The second notification display device 202 is started.

  The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through the signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203, that is, each display according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. The segment light emission control is performed. The third display IC 207 can store the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the third notification display device. 203 is displayed continuously. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the third display IC 207 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the third display IC 207, the display is performed on the third display IC 207. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped It will be started by the third notification display device 203.

  The fourth display IC 208 is provided in correspondence with the fourth notification display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL37 and electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 through the signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204, that is, each display according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. The segment light emission control is performed. The fourth display IC 208 can store the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data in the fourth notification display device. 204 is displayed continuously. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data. The fourth notification display device 204 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the fourth display IC 208, the display is performed on the fourth display IC 208. A configuration may be adopted in which data can be stored. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped The fourth notification display device 204 starts.

  Output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, and output setting of the display data is performed by each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. That is, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the main CPU 63 and the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the management CPU 112. In this case, the display data output setting period is adjusted in each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 so that the display data output setting is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 is performed. On the other hand, the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 is not performed. On the other hand, in the state where the setting value is not changeable, the display data output setting is performed by the management CPU 112 while the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 is not performed.

  If the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 are performed at the time of synchronization, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 has priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 may be prioritized.

  Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. After that, whether or not the timing of updating the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is determined by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. Is determined (step S3002).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, 1 is added to the value of the display target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3003). When the value of the display target counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S3004: YES), the display target counter value is cleared to “0” (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, the thirty-first to forty-second parameters, and display target counters “0” to “24”. There is a one-to-one correspondence with possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter that is the first display target is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. In the case, the forty-second parameter that is the last display target is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, display data setting processing corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and display data setting processing corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is “0” and the first parameter is a display target, display data for displaying “A” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed in the first display IC 205. In addition to outputting, display data for displaying “1” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. For example, if the value of the display target counter is “24” and the forty-second parameter is a display target, display data for displaying “O” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed in the first display. While outputting to IC205, the display data for displaying "2" on the 2nd alerting display apparatus 202 are output to 2nd display IC206.

  Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the 10th place and the display data corresponding to the 1st place are obtained by multiplying the read parameter by 100. Read from the management-side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 so that the number corresponding to the tenth digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth corresponding to the number corresponding to the first digit is displayed. Display control of the notification display device 204 is performed (step S3011). For example, when the result obtained by multiplying by 100 is “53”, display data for displaying “5” on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207 and also displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Display data for displaying “3” is output to the fourth display IC 208.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

  By executing the display process as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main body 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is done regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.204.

  The display of the game history management result on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the operation power supply to the management CPU 112 is started and the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Is done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is displayed.

  The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold display data output from the MPU 62 while operating power is supplied, and correspond to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 corresponding to the display data. Display control. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not turned off (that is, not displayed), and are turned on corresponding to some display ( That is, the display state.

  Next, the setting value update processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the extinguishing process of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is executed (step S3101). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. As a result, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are not displayed. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all turned off, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are displayed. ˜204 is a non-display state. Therefore, step S3101 is a process of maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in a non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is temporarily affected, If it is in the display state, it is a process of making it non-display state.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When “1” is set in the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting value up to that point.

  Thereafter, the display start processing for the set value in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the set value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S3107: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed, the setting value is updated to one level higher. When the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting value is set to “setting 1”. Will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, a display update process for the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, a number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. The administrator of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the fourth notification display device 204.

  After executing the process of step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processing after step S3105 is executed again. When OFF operation is performed (step S3104: YES), the management result display start process in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

  In the display start processing, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management-side CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). Thereby, the display corresponding to the 1st parameter calculated just before the operating electric power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

  Next, display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. FIG. 57 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when a game history management result is displayed, and FIG. 57 (b) is a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display aspect of the display apparatuses 201-204 for 1st-4th alerting | reporting in case 10 setting states are changed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. This is the same even when any of the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters is a notification target. . Thereby, the manager of the game hall visually observes that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, so that in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, It is possible to grasp that the management result of the game history is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), all the display segments are turned off in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203. That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state. Further, any one of “1” to “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. As described above, when any one of “1” to “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state, The manager of the game hall can grasp that the display corresponding to the set value is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and can clearly grasp the current set value. It becomes possible.

  Next, how the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enter the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (h). 58A shows a changeable state period during which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58B shows an update of the setting display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 58 (c) shows a period during which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58 (d) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. The display update timing corresponding to the management result of the game history in 201-204 is shown, FIG.58 (e) shows the period when the display apparatus 201 for 1st notifications is a display state, FIG.58 (f) is the 1st. 2 shows a period in which the notification display device 202 is in a display state, FIG. 58 (g) shows a period in which the third notification display device 203 is in a display state, and FIG. 58 (h) shows a fourth notification. The display device 204 is in a display state It is shown.

  When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started with the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Can be changed. At the timing t1, the setting display update timing is reached as shown in FIG. 58B, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state as shown in FIG. 58H, and the display state is continued. In this case, since “setting 1” is selected, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are not displayed, that is, all display segments are turned off. Maintained.

  Thereafter, an operation for changing the set value is performed by operating the update button 68b at each of the timing t2, the timing t3, the timing t4, and the timing t5, and as shown in FIG. This is the update timing of the set value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), in the fourth notification display device 204, the display content is switched to a number corresponding to the set value after the change at each timing. The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state including the respective timings when. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, that is, for all display, at each of the update timings of the set value display. The segment is kept off.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off at the timing of t6, whereby the changeable state is terminated as shown in FIG. In this case, the display period of the management result of the game history is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state at the timing t6, and the fourth notification display is performed. Although the display content of the device 204 is changed, the display status is maintained.

  Thereafter, the timing of t7, t8, t9, t10, t11, and t12 is the update timing of the display of the game history management result as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (h), in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display contents corresponding to the management result of the updated game history are displayed at each timing. Although being switched, all the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state including the timings at which the display contents are switched.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the configuration in which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a corresponding display is provided. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Accordingly, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing a display corresponding to the changeable state. .

  This corresponds to the period in which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting value changeable state on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period during which the display is performed. Thereby, any display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by grasping the situation in which the display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify whether or not

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured so as to have a display mode different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by identifying the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is specified which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the game history management results. Further, since there are a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode is greatly increased when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. It is possible to make it different.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 that are not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be performed only by confirming whether or not the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly identify which one is being performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and the display content is the fourth notification display device 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed. This is the display content that can be displayed. In this way, by allowing the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 to overlap, each of the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed are performed. It becomes possible not to give restrictions to the display contents. In addition, even if the display contents in the fourth notification display device 204 can overlap, the first to third notification display devices are displayed when the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. Since 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. Thereby, the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is clearly different between the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. It becomes possible.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state even when the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed. . Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history regardless of the timing when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed in the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed, the display of the game history management result and the setting value can be changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed.

  In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the horizontal direction, the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed using only the fourth notification display device 204 arranged at the right end. Done. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed using the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the management result of the game history. In this case, in the setting value changeable state, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 that display the type of management result of the game history are not displayed. Thereby, the non-display state of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type corresponds to the changeable state of the set value, and corresponds to the changeable state of the set value. It becomes easy to grasp that the display is performed.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 on which the type of the management result of the game history is displayed, but also the game The third notification display device 203 on which the contents of the history management results are displayed is also hidden. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp that the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed.

  Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In the configuration, the display data is stored and held in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Thereby, for example, even when the execution of processing for advancing the game is stopped in the main CPU 63 due to occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality (when an affirmative determination is made in step S306), It becomes possible to maintain the display of the game history management results in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the objects that are not displayed (all unlit) in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed are the first to fourth notification devices. It is good also as the 1st, 2nd information display apparatus 201,202, without being limited to the 3rd information display apparatus 201-203. In this case, the third notification display device 203 performs a predetermined display (for example, “5”) that is different from the content of the current setting value, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the current setting value. The fourth notification display device 204 may perform a predetermined display (for example, a display of “5”) different from the content of the current set value, and the third notification. The display device 203 may be configured to display numbers corresponding to the current set values. In addition, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all-off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. The first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a non-display state (all off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in the display state. The second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all-off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all-off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 Is displayed It may be configured.

  Moreover, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in a non-display state (all-off state). Only the display device 202 may be in a non-display state (all-off state), or only the third notification display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all-off state). The fourth notification display device Only 204 may be in a non-display state (all off state).

  In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 is displayed. It may be configured to be in a state, or only the third notification display device 203 may be in a display state.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in a setting value changeable state are different from those in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 59A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed in a bar shape and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. The seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 is a so-called seven-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 59B, the second notification display device 202 includes seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed in a bar shape, and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. The seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged so that the second notification display device 202 is a so-called seven-segment display.

  FIG. 60 shows a case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case where a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is displayed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus 201 for 1st notifications and the display apparatus 202 for 2nd notifications.

  The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the management result of the game history are the same as in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, any one of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and “1” to “8” are displayed on the second notification display device 202. "Is displayed.

  In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, At least one of the “O” displays is a light emission target. That is, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not the light emission target even when any of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 are displayed. Does not exist.

  Similarly, for the second notification display device 202, the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 are “1” to “8” in the second notification display device 202, respectively. Among these displays, at least one kind of display is a light emission target. That is, there is no display segment 202a to 202g that is not a light emission target even when any of “1” to “8” is displayed on the second notification display device 202.

  In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state in the first notification display device 201. As described above, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. Furthermore, in any case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. On the other hand, the display content of the first notification display device 201 in which only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are in the light emitting state is management of game history. Does not exist when displaying results. As a result, when the management result of the game history is displayed while using the display segments 201b and 201e that can be in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed in the setting value changeable state, the display is not displayed. The mode can be displayed on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, it is possible to cause the first notification display device 201 to perform display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It becomes possible.

  In the setting value changeable state, in the second notification display device 202, the third display segment 202c is in a light emitting state. As described above, the third display segment 202c can be in a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the second notification display device 202. On the other hand, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in which only the third display segment 202c among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is in the light emitting state exists when displaying the management result of the game history. Not done. As a result, a display mode that is not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed while using the display segment 202c that can be in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed in the setting value changeable state. It can be displayed on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be performed on the second notification display device 202 while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It becomes possible.

  Next, the setting value update processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, set value display start processing in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, for the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in an unlit state. Is output to the first display IC 205. For the second notification display device 202, the display data is output to the second display IC 206 in which the third display segment 202 c is in the light emitting state and the other display segments 202 a, 202 b, 202 d to 202 g are in the unlit state. Thereby, the display for alert | reporting that it is a changeable state which can change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is started by the display apparatus 201 for 1st notifications and the display apparatus 202 for 2nd notifications.

  Then, the light-off process of the 3rd alerting | reporting display apparatus 203 is performed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When “1” is set in the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting value up to that point.

  Thereafter, a display start process of the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the set value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF.

  If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S3208: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed, the setting value is updated to one level higher. When the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of “setting 6”, the setting value is set to “setting 1”. Will return.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3208, or when the process of step S3209 is executed, a display update process for the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, a number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. The administrator of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the fourth notification display device 204.

  After executing the process of step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processing after step S3206 is executed again. When OFF operation is performed (step S3205: YES), the management result display start process in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

  In the display start processing, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management-side CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). Thereby, the display corresponding to the 1st parameter calculated just before the operating electric power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The setting value can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that can be in a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed to the light emitting state. A display corresponding to the state is performed. Thereby, when diversifying the display of the management result of the game history, it is possible to minimize the restrictions on the contents of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to be in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. The combination of 202g is a combination that does not exist when the management result of the game history is displayed. Thereby, the management result display of the game history is performed by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. It is possible to grasp which of the displays corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed.

  For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are not in a light emitting state even if the display of the game history management results is performed in all patterns. Not done. As a result, it is possible to minimize the display contents of the management result of the game history as much as possible when diversifying the display corresponding to the management result of the game history.

  When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the third notification display device 203 that is not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed is in the non-display state. Thereby, not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 but also whether or not the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state, the game history It is possible to clearly identify which one of the management result display and the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, it is limited to a configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 can be changed is set. However, a configuration in which a plurality of types are set may be employed. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents may be determined in advance, and the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order each time a changeable state is newly executed. As described above, even when there are a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the setting value changeable state, the display contents are displayed in the display segment 201a that is in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed. -201g and 202a-202g are displayed, and the display contents are not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed.

  In addition, in one of the case of displaying the management result of the game history and the case of performing the display corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices It is good also as a structure by which blink display is performed in 201,202 and the display which maintains lighting is performed on the other. In this case, the game hall manager can specify which of the display of the game history management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state depending on whether it is blinking display or lighting display. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be a combination used when displaying the management result of the game history, and management of the game history Combinations that are not used when displaying results may also be used. In addition, the lighting period and the extinguishing period in the blinking display may be the same in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely shifted. Alternatively, a configuration in which only a part overlaps may be used.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding thereto is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, unlike the eleventh embodiment. Yes. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65.

  The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on abnormal states to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In the abnormality display area 211, a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d are provided. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. Each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d can store information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 one by one. That is, the abnormality display area 211 can store and hold up to four pieces of information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 specifies all information on the abnormal state that occurs in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when an abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball (for example, a full tank in the lower plate 56a, no ball in the tank 75, a payout abnormality by the payout device 76) occurs, a command corresponding to the generated abnormality is issued to the payout CPU 92. To the main CPU 63. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an improper radio wave, a corresponding abnormal signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63 and an abnormal signal is detected. When vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor, a corresponding abnormality signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, based on the fact that normal signal transmission from each of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 49a is not specified, occurrence of disconnection abnormality of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 49a is specified.

  The type of abnormal state specified by the main CPU 63 is larger than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information occurs even though the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. On the other hand, for the abnormal state information, the storage priority is set at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and a new number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. When an abnormal state occurs, information on the abnormal state having a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to the notification of the abnormal state having a high storage priority.

  Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display target has occurred (step S3301). The types of abnormality display targets include a full tank of the lower plate 56a, no balls in the tank 75, a dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76, a radio wave detection abnormality, a vibration detection abnormality, and a disconnection abnormality of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality display objects is larger than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211 a to 211 d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, whether or not the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has already been stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Is determined (step S3302). If already stored, information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same type of abnormal state information from being stored redundantly in the abnormal display area 211.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically “4”) (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in which abnormality state information is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormality display area 211.

  When the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), priority comparison processing is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority is specified from the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. The storage priority is determined in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the bottom of the lower plate 56a is full, the ball of the tank 75 is absent, the vibration is detected abnormally, the payout is abnormal due to the payout device 76, and the ball is detected. Storage priority increases in the order of disconnection abnormality of 49a to radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, whichever storage priority is higher, the information on the abnormal state with the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target that has occurred this time. To make a comparison.

  When the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. Thereby, in the configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display objects is larger than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, information on the abnormal state having a high storage priority is displayed. It can be left in the abnormality display area 211.

  When the storage priority of the abnormality display target generated this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the abnormality display area 211 setting processing is executed (step S3306). In the setting process of the abnormal display area 211 executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, this occurs in the unit areas 211a to 211d identified as storing information on the abnormal state with the lowest storage priority. Overwrite the abnormal status information corresponding to the abnormal display target.

  On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), 1 is added to the value of the abnormality target counter (step S3307), and then the abnormality display area 211 is set. Is executed (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from the unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormal display area 211 in which no abnormal state information is stored, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time in the selected area. Stores the information.

  In step S3306, when there is only one abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and the abnormal display area 211 is displayed. When there is a plurality of abnormal state information stored in the area, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of “n” in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b.

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether an abnormality display target cancellation event has occurred (step S3308). For example, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the payout side CPU 92 indicating that the lower tray 56a is full, that the tank 75 is free of balls, or that the payout abnormality by the payout device 76 is released. judge. In addition, it is determined whether an abnormality canceling operation for occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality has been performed, an abnormality canceling operation for occurrence of vibration detection abnormality has been performed, or an abnormality canceling operation for occurrence of disconnection abnormality has been performed. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, the abnormality display area 211 is erased (step S3309). In the erasing process, it is specified whether or not the information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has been canceled this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. If it is stored, the information on the abnormal state is erased by clearing the stored area to “0”. In this case, if there is only one abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasure, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. When there are a plurality of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area of the nth unit areas 211a to 211b having the smallest “n” value. Further, 1 is subtracted from the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3310).

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display start operation has occurred (step S3311). The abnormality display start operation is performed by pressing the update button 68b with the gaming machine main body 12 being opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. This is done by operating.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether or not information on one or more abnormal states is stored in the abnormality display area 211 (step S3312). When the information on the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abnormal display from starting even though there is no abnormal state information to be notified.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, "1" is set to the abnormal display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3313). The abnormal display flag cancels the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and displays the display corresponding to the information on the abnormal state stored in the abnormal display area 211 through the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation should be performed at Even if an abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormality display flag is already set to “1”, a negative determination is made in step S3311.

  Thereafter, the management result display stop setting process is executed (step S3314). In the cancellation setting process, a display cancellation command is transmitted to the management CPU 112 to temporarily stop the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management CPU 112 receives the display stop command and stops the display processing (FIG. 55). However, even if the management-side CPU 112 receives a display stop command, the management-side CPU 112 does not set display data that is all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the management result of the game history at that time is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormal display end operation has occurred (step S3315). The abnormal display ending operation is performed by pressing the reset button 68c with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. This is done by operating. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3316). Even if an abnormal display end operation is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already “0”, a negative determination is made in step S3315.

  Thereafter, a cancellation cancellation process of the management result display is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, the display of the management result display of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is canceled by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management CPU 112. To release. The management-side CPU 112 resumes the execution of the display process (FIG. 55) by receiving the cancellation cancellation command. However, even if the management-side CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, the management-side CPU 112 does not set display data to be all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormal display at that time is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the management CPU 112 continues to store history information and calculate various parameters even when the update of the display of the game history management results is stopped, and the results of calculating the various parameters are calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the update of the display of the game history management result is canceled, the display of the latest game history management result is immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be resumed.

  In the abnormality setting process, when “1” is set in the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), an abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the abnormality display process.

  First, the turning-off process of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that the display content of the abnormal display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is updated. If the value of the update timing counter is already “0”, that state is maintained. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter is “0” ( Step S3403).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, a display target counter update process provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In this update process, if this time is the first process of the abnormal display process after “1” is set in the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65, “0” is set in the display target counter. The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Specifically, the value of “0” of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The value “1” of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the value “2” of the display target counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and “3” of the display target counter. "Corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the update process, if the current abnormal display process time is not the first abnormal display process after the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1”, the value of the display target counter is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not abnormal state information is stored in an area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as described above, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored. In this case, information on abnormal states is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of “n” in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b. Therefore, if no abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, the abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to a value larger than the value of the display target counter. There will be no. If the value of the display target counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “3”, the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so that the information on the abnormal state is not stored. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all the abnormal states that are the targets of the abnormality display are canceled in the situation where the abnormality display is performed. In this case, even if the abnormal display process is executed, the abnormal display area 211 does not store the abnormal state information. In such a situation, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 display to indicate that no abnormal state information is stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405 or if the process of step S3406 is executed, display target display data corresponding to the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is read out from the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are displayed for each type of abnormal state information. It is different. There is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, which is different from the display data corresponding to abnormal state information. Therefore, when there is no abnormal state information, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are different from the display contents when the abnormal state information exists.

  On the other hand, the display content corresponding to the information on the abnormal state in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display content corresponding to the absence of the information on the abnormal state are The display contents when the management results of the game history are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 overlap with the display contents of the set values on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when the management result of the game history is displayed, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state and the fourth notification display device 204 is in a display state. Since 201 and 202 are in a non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in a display state, even if the display contents overlap as described above, any situation is supported. The administrator of the game hall can grasp whether the display is displayed.

  Thereafter, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 in accordance with the display data read in step S3407 (step S3408), and display control is performed on the fourth notification display device 204 (step S3409). In this case, the display device 203 for the third notification and the fourth notification device 4 are used for either the display corresponding to the information on the abnormal state or the display corresponding to the absence of the information on the abnormal state. None of the display devices 204 are in a non-display state (that is, they are not completely turned off), and are in some display state.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3410).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Done. Accordingly, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing display corresponding to the abnormal state.

  When the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the display corresponding to the abnormal state when no abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 A display corresponding to the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  A period in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period of time. Thereby, any display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by grasping the situation in which the display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify whether or not

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured so as to have a display mode different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by identifying the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is specified which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the game history management results. In addition, due to the presence of a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode is greatly increased when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make it different.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that are not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed only by confirming whether or not the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly identify which one is being performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, and the display content is the third when the management result of the game history is displayed. , Display contents that can be displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. In this way, by allowing the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 to overlap, a display corresponding to the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when they are performed. In addition, even when the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can overlap, the first and first notifications are displayed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. 2 Since the notification display devices 201 and 202 are not displayed, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, when an abnormal display start operation is performed in a situation where abnormal state information is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to not having been memorize | stored is performed.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In this embodiment, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start reference. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the number corresponding to the management start reference value without storing history information in the history memory 117 until the number corresponding to the value is equal to or greater than the number. The storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. In the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before the shipment. In this case, the game balls are maintained in the respective ball-entry portions and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set in the start time management counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The start-time management counter indicates which of the seven ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is used to identify the detection state of the game ball in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start-time management counter (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the start time management counter is “7” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. When the value of the start time management counter is “6” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the start time management is determined. If the value of the counter is “5” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the start time management counter is If “4” corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the start time management counter is “3”. If it corresponds to the working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth output flag is set. It is determined whether or not “1” is set. If the value of the start time management counter is “2” and corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a, “1” is set to the sixth output flag. If the value of the start time management counter is “1” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. . Note that “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15) as already described.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start time management counter is cleared to “0” (step S3504). Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is not set to “1”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge number counter is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506). The management start reference value is set to “300”, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a number smaller than “300” or may be configured to be larger than “300”. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S3503 or a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start time management counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start management counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, the management output process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the discharge number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), “1” is set to the management start flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3509). Thereafter, a management process is executed (step S3510). The management process is also executed when the management start flag is set to “1” and an affirmative determination is made in step S3501 (step S3510). The processing contents of the management process are the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. The history memory 117 does not store history information until the number corresponding to the start reference value or more, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value. In this case, the storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. In the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before the shipment. In this case, the game balls are maintained in the respective ball-entry portions and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  Here, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above, until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, In the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the memory 117, the management result of the game history during that time cannot be calculated. Therefore, in such a situation, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform display corresponding to the situation. For example, it is good also as a structure which makes all the display segments light-emit in each of the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display apparatuses 201-204. The display content is not displayed either when displaying the management result of the game history or when displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. By confirming the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not the history information is stored as described above.

  It should be noted that the setting mode of the management start flag information in the main RAM 65 differs depending on whether or not the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started. It is good also as composition to do. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the different form executed by the main CPU 63. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processing as steps S101 to S109 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the main processing (FIG. The same processing as in steps S110 to S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3610), and the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is executed after executing the process of step S3620. Is set to “1” (step S3621). According to this configuration, when the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 History information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the management start reference value is greater than or equal to the management start reference value, and when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, The history information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of game balls discharged after the start of supply of operating power. This makes it possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 is not likely.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. Instead of the configuration having no history, an area for storing history information may be provided separately from the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls reaches the management start reference value or more. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the said situation.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. As a condition under which no situation occurs, a condition may be added in which supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is not stored in the history memory 117. In this case, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is already stored in the history memory 117, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start reference. Regardless of whether or not the value is greater than or equal to the value, history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. In addition to or instead of the above configuration, when an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality occurs, history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored for an event that has occurred in the abnormal state.

  In addition, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. In addition to or instead of the configuration, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is opened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored for an event that occurs in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is opened.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. However, in addition to or instead of this, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode is determined as the game area. It is good also as a structure which calculates the result divided by the total discharge | emission number of the game ball from PA. In addition to or instead of this, a configuration is obtained in which a result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode by the total number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It is good.

  (2) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode, the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode per unit gaming times and the ratio of the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode are calculated. However, in addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA may be calculated. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. It is good also as a structure.

  (3) Not only the jackpot result but also the jackpot result may exist as a game result that triggers the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of a small hit result, the open / close execution mode is generated, but the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which becomes low frequency prize-winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode which became a small hit result. In this case, when a jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is recorded as history. The configuration may be stored in the memory 117 for use. In this configuration, a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the big hit result and a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the small hit result may be calculated by using the history information stored in the history memory 117.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and it is good also as a structure which does not change. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning the small hit result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, a higher setting value may have a higher probability of winning the small hit result, and a higher setting value wins the small hit result. It is good also as a structure with a low probability of doing.

  Further, in a configuration in which a small hit result exists, the hold information acquired when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 and the game information that is acquired when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 are acquired. When the jackpot result is different from the holding information, the distribution ratio of the type of jackpot result is different, and when aiming to enter the first operating port 33, the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA In addition, the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area, and when aiming to enter the second operation port 34, the game ball flows down the right area from the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. In addition, a configuration in which a launch operation is performed, and a configuration in which a small hit result can be generated based on the hold information acquired when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 may be possible.

In this configuration, the following 51st parameter may exist as a game history management result. Note that the normal period is the sum of the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result based on the ball entering the first operating port 33 and the execution period of the low-frequency support mode instead of the opening / closing execution mode. To do. Also, the number of balls entered into the out port 24a during the normal period is the number of balls entered K51, and the number of balls entered into the general prize port 31 during the normal period is the number of balls entered K52. The number of balls entered is K53, the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 during the normal period is the number K54 of incoming balls, and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 during the normal period is the number of incoming balls K55.
51st parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out during the normal period (K52 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K53 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K54 × “first” The number of winning balls for winning in the operating port 33 + K55 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the work area PA in the normal period (K51 + K52 + K53 + K54 + K55) In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, if the winning probability of the small hit result varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the small hit result does not vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is not deleted even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

  (4) Regardless of the configuration in which history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of which type of jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result May be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency is calculated for each type of jackpot result.

  (5) Although various parameters (first to eighth parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter and 41st to 42nd parameters) are periodically calculated, The present invention is not limited to this. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 10,000). Various parameters may be calculated when the supply of operating power is stopped, or various parameters may be calculated when the number of game times executed reaches the number of times of calculation (for example, 1000 times). Good. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” at the timing when various parameters are calculated.

  (6) Every time the calculation timing of various parameters is reached, all of the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the various parameters is subject to computation at one computation timing, and the parameter group to be computed is sequentially changed at each computation timing. It is good also as a structure. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is calculated. In the timing, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters may be calculated, and thereafter, the calculation target may be changed in the above order every time the calculation timing comes. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the parameter when one calculation timing is reached.

  (7) Various parameters may be calculated using history information in the history memory 117 on condition that a game is being played. For example, the calculation of various parameters may be executed on condition that a game ball is supplied to the game area PA. As a result, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being unnecessarily repeated even though no game is being played.

  (8) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 may be configured to perform the function of the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in advance in the main ROM 64. In addition, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, and a separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. The history RAM 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate memory 171 may be provided in the main RAM 65. A configuration in which the function of the storage memory 171 is performed may be employed. In the configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, when the clear processing (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed, the history memory A part or all of the areas corresponding to the memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to “0”. The history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage The area corresponding to each of the memory 171 may be excluded from the “0” clear target, and “0” may be cleared when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. Further, in the main RAM 65, the manual operation contents for executing the clear process in the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas may be different. Good. The function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the sound emission control device 81.

  (9) When a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, while the various kinds of information stored in the calculation result memory 131 are stored. A configuration may be used in which parameters are deleted. Thus, after a new setting state is set, it is possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is made.

  (10) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the setting value update process is executed in the main CPU 63), If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the history memory 117 may not be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed for all the areas for storing the setting values in the main RAM 65, the setting value updating process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed, the management CPU 112 may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

  Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the history memory 117 is not cleared, and the management CPU 112 has specified that the setting value has been changed. In this case, the history memory 117 can be cleared.

  (11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the set value update process is executed in the main CPU 63), When the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the configuration may be such that the calculation processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated in response to a new setting state even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed for all the areas for storing the setting values in the main RAM 65, the setting value updating process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed, the management CPU 112 may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

  Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management side CPU 112 does not execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state. When it is specified that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute various parameter calculations triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

  (12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, various parameters are calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. Rather, the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the storage target area in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 and the calculation is performed. The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 at an early stage. Become.

  (13) In the third to fifth embodiments, when the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are subjected to a predetermined display start operation. It is good also as a structure displayed on the display apparatus 69a-69c for 1st-3rd information, or another display apparatus. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation unit for performing other operations. As a result, various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171 can be easily confirmed.

  (14) Although all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are set as the storage targets of the history information (or the ball entering history), It is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is a storage target of history information. It is good. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is configured to store history information. It ’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode in a predetermined period for the ball entry part for which history information is to be stored.

  (15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in association with each of the first prize opening detection sensor 42a, the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. Although 118a-118c was set as the structure, it is not limited to this, The information corresponding to the entrance result about the same type of entrance part has two or more entrance parts of the same type. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of entrance detection sensors exist corresponding thereto may be transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be suppressed.

  (16) The correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. The configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (17) The correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can communicate with each other, and the management IC 66 requests transmission of correspondence information. When the signal is received, the correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing. Correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 is configured to store and hold the operation power. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

  (18) The transmission information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is indicated by each incoming detection sensor. The signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of 42a to 48a are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is transferred from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. A dedicated signal path for transmission may be provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can determine which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (19) While the information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, the information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be transmitted to the side CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the sound emission control device 81, notification corresponding to the content of various parameters is executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. It may be configured to

  (20) When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculated The contents of various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entering mode of the game area PA on the previous business day was normal when the game hall started business.

  (21) A configuration in which a game cannot be started on the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition canceling operation is performed when various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results. It is good. As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration in which the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is invalidated, or the first operation port Even if a winning to 33 or the 2nd operation mouth 34 occurs, it is good also as composition which does not perform the success-and-failure determination processing. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the reset button 68c being pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game ball entering mode in the game area PA is in an abnormal mode. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is abnormal.

  (22) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed in either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. Also, the configuration may be such that neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by an operator of the reading work. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using the read history information in the external device. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (23) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to output history information or information of various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, history information and various parameters can be read by an external device.

  (24) Although the reading terminal 68d used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by an external device, the present invention is not limited to this. The terminal used for reading history information or various parameters with an external device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (25) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. For example, these memories 116, 117, and 131 are provided. Is provided as volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and store information, and supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying backup power to the memory. Even in such a case, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply / launch control device 78 that supplies the main RAM 65 with backup power. Also good.

  (26) The management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to a configuration that executes history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63. The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. For example, in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit has received the signal. The counter value corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, when an operation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (27) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (28) Regarding the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a, the number of balls entered is measured, while the number of game balls such as the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is increased. The history information including the RTC information may be stored for the entry into the bonus opportunity entry part that becomes the trigger for the payout of winning balls and the determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball portion with respect to the total number of game balls discharged while allowing the game ball entry history to the privilege opportunity ball portion to be extracted. Become.

  (29) A configuration other than those in the above embodiments may be included as a predetermined event that triggers storage of history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. It may be configured that at least one of the timing when the ball has become unsatisfied, the timing at which the ball has no state is started, and the timing at which the state without the ball is released is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 becomes in an abnormal state. In addition, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (30) In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 when the type identification command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. It is good. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o is compatible with the set value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

  (31) The management IC 66 may transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (32) The display device that displays the setting value being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the third notification display device 69c, and may be the symbol display device 41. The display device may be used.

  (33) The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. In addition, positions corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the part 68a may be set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a can be further rotated from the ON position, and the setting value being updated is set to the setting value in the next order each time the rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed. It is good also as a structure updated.

  (34) In the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side, but may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel diagonally, and good also as a structure arranged in parallel so that it may become two steps of upper and lower sides. In the 11th to 14th embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side. However, the display devices 201 to 204 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction. It is good also as a structure currently arranged in parallel, and it is good also as a structure arranged in parallel so that it may become two steps of upper and lower sides.

  (35) History information used for calculating a parameter whose normal value fluctuates in accordance with the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as fluctuation target history information), and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 Accordingly, history information (hereinafter, referred to as non-change target history information) used for calculating a parameter whose normal value does not change may be stored in different areas in the history memory 117. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, an area in which history information to be changed is stored in the history memory 117 is “0”. On the other hand, the area in which history information that is not changed is stored in the history memory 117 may be configured not to be cleared to “0”. Thereby, the calculation of the parameter whose normal value fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately performed even after the setting value is changed, and the normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The accuracy of parameter calculation can be increased.

  (36) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, the both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (37) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or a game ball in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, for example, a result of a lottery process of a combination executed when starting one game based on an operation of a start lever is history information. The actual winning probability of each role may be calculated using the history information, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information, and the history The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using information, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of setting states such as “setting 1” to “setting 6” exist and the winning probability in the lottery process of the combination may be changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration in each of the above embodiments may be applied with respect to handling of history information, calculation of various parameters, and handling of repeated changes when a setting state setting is newly set or a setting value is changed. .

  (38) The characteristic configurations of the first to fourteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment are combined. Also good. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the said another form with arbitrary combinations with respect to the structure which applied the characteristic structure of the said 1st-14th embodiment with the predetermined combination.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
An information erasure unit (a third erasure unit) that erases at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, based on at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the steps S2306 to S2 in the management CPU 112 in the sixth embodiment. A function for executing the process of S2308, a function for executing the process of step S2608 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is erased on the basis of at least one condition that the setting value to be used is newly set. As a result, it is possible to adjust the contents of the history storage unit so that the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the setting value to be used is newly set can be suitably managed. .

Feature A2. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature A2, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value. In this case, since the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, the history storage unit can appropriately manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the assignment correspondence result is changed. The contents can be adjusted.

  Feature A3. The information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storage means on the condition that at least one of the setting values to be used by the setting means has been set. A gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2.

  According to the feature A3, setting of the setting value to be used is performed by erasing all the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. It is possible to specify the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event with reference to the timing at which this is newly performed.

  Feature A4. The information erasing unit erases a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is left.

  According to the feature A4, when a setting value to be used is newly set, history information unnecessary for managing the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event thereafter is deleted, and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event thereafter is managed. Necessary history information can be left. Thereby, it is possible to suitably manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information in which an occurrence probability of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value (history indicating that an opening / closing execution mode has occurred). Information) and second history information that does not vary according to the set value (history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA),
The information erasure unit erases the first history information stored in the history storage unit, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the second history information stored in history storage means is left.

  According to the feature A5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to a predetermined event whose occurrence probability varies according to the setting value is deleted, and the occurrence probability is the set value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not vary according to the is not deleted. Accordingly, when the first history information before the setting value to be used is newly set is inherited after the setting value is newly set, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information is generated. The first history information which is not preferable in specifying the frequency can be deleted when the setting value is newly set. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information is specified by not deleting even if a setting value to be used is newly set. Since a large number of second history information can be secured, it is possible to specify the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information with high accuracy.

Feature A6. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
According to the setting value, the probability of the grant correspondence result in the grant determination varies.
The first history information includes information corresponding to the provision of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to a game ball being discharged from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

  According to the feature A6, since the privilege grant probability varies depending on the set value, the first history information is deleted when the set value to be used is newly set. Thus, it is possible to specify the privilege grant frequency under the setting value that has been newly set. On the other hand, since the frequency at which game balls are discharged from the game area does not vary according to the set value, the second history information is not deleted even if a set value to be used is newly set, It becomes possible to specify the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner with high accuracy.

  Feature A7. The information erasure unit is configured to set at least the history information when the setting unit sets the setting value to be used and when the history storage unit stores a predetermined amount of the history information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein a part is erased.

  According to the feature A7, when predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more, the history information is not erased even if a new setting value to be used is set. As a result, even if a new setting value is repeated in a situation where no game is played, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history storage unit from being repeatedly erased.

  Feature A8. Corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, on the condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set Information deriving means for deriving the mode information to be performed (a function for executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein:

  According to the feature A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit has the configuration of the feature A1 and is stored on the basis of at least one condition that a setting value to be used is newly set. An aspect corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using history information stored in the history storage means when a new setting value to be used is set in the configuration to be deleted Information is derived. As a result, even if at least a part of the history information is deleted when the setting value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed is grasped. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising aspect information storage means (another storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature A9, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature A10, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage unit, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods are grasped based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. In addition, even if a new setting value is repeated under a situation where no game is played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is being played is substantially the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature A11. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value set by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, further comprising a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A11, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed does not remain in the aspect information storage unit. When the new setting is repeated, a special process is performed on the new setting. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with the action.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving unit derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature A12, since the aspect information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit, it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being unnecessarily derived. .

  Feature A13. The information erasing unit erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit until a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit. Without setting the setting value when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit after the setting unit sets the setting value to be used by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted.

  According to the feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that has been set is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means includes
When the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to when the release condition is satisfied, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storage unit and Means for storing in both the second history storage means (function to execute the process of step S2604 in the management CPU 112);
Means for storing the history information corresponding to the first history storage means and the second history storage means set as a storage target when the predetermined event occurs in a period other than the predetermined period (Function for executing the process of step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112);
With
The information erasure unit erases the history information stored in the storage target of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit until the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein:

  According to the feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect simply by appropriately changing the history storage unit that is the storage target of the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature A15. Deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means The gaming machine according to Feature A14, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of Step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

  According to the feature A15, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit due to the new setting value setting, the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A15, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
With
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage unit before setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to the setting value to be used by the setting unit. The gaming machine is stored and held in the history storage means even after the game.

  According to the feature B1, since the setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is stored and held without being erased. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that time can be continuously stored in the history storage means and accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time. The management result of the game history can be specified using the history information.

  Feature B2. The history storage execution means, when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history storage means corresponding to the setting is stored in the history storage means (first storage The game according to Feature B1, including a function for executing the process of step S1307 in the management-side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2408 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Machine.

  According to the feature B2, the setting value to be used is newly set in the configuration in which the history information is stored and held without being erased even if the setting value to be used is newly set. The corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed and history information after the setting is performed.

  Feature B3. The storage execution unit at the time of setting causes the history storage unit to store information corresponding to the set setting value as the history information when the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

  Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of corresponding history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

  According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each setting value, it is possible to store history information separately for each setting value.

  Feature B5. In the case where the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the setting value for which the setting has been made is a storage target of the history information (management side The gaming machine according to Feature B4, further including a function of executing the process of Step S2406 in the CPU 112).

  According to the feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the setting value is a storage target of subsequent history information. It is possible to store history information in distinction.

  Feature B6. Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the correspondence history storing means as the storage target (display output processing in the management CPU 112) The gaming machine according to Feature B5, which is provided with a function of

  According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which history information is stored separately for each set value, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set value.

Feature B7. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature B7, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the result of giving correspondence according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
The post-setting handling means that does not erase the history information until the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed until at least a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means. (Function to execute the processing of step S2506 and step S2605 to step S2609 in the management-side CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

  Feature C2. The post-setting handling means sets the setting value when a predetermined amount of history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage means is erased before the game is performed.

  According to the feature C2, when a specific amount of history information is stored in the history storage unit, the management result of the game history in a predetermined period after the setting value is newly set can be specified. The history information stored in the history storage means before the new setting value is set is deleted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means includes
When the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the history information corresponding to the first history storage means and the second history storage means set as a storage target (step S2603 in the management CPU 112) Function to execute processing)
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means (management-side CPU 112) for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means for the occurrence of the predetermined event until the predetermined amount or more is stored. The function of executing the process of step S2604 in FIG.
With
The post-setting response means is
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for changing the storage object between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (function to execute the processing of step S2607 in the management side CPU 112) when the specified amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. When the specified amount or more is stored, the history information on the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that has been set as the storage target until then (step S2608 in the management CPU 112) Function to execute processing)
A gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect simply by appropriately changing the history storage unit that is the storage target of the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature C4. Deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means The gaming machine according to Feature C3, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of Step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

  According to the feature C4, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit due to a new setting value setting, the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

Feature C5. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature C5, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Special execution means for executing special processing on the basis of at least one condition that setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in a special situation (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112) A function for executing processing, a function for executing repetitive change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for making a negative determination in step S2106 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. In this case, the special processing is executed on at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with a case where a new setting value is set under an unfavorable situation.

  Feature D2. The special execution means executes the special processing on at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a specific number of times or more in the special situation. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature D2, even if a new setting value to be used in a special situation is executed, the special process is not executed if the number of executions is less than a specific number. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special process from being executed until a regular worker performs a new setting value setting less than a specific number of times in a special situation.

  Feature D3. The special execution means sets, as the special situation, a situation in which a game has not been performed since the setting value is set by the setting means or a setting value to be used by the setting means. The special process is executed on at least one condition that the setting means has set the setting value to be used in a situation where a game exceeding a predetermined standard has not been played since A gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D3, when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed in a situation where no game is performed or a game is not substantially performed, special processing is executed. When this action is performed, it is possible to cope with it.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution unit executes a notification process as the special process.

  According to the feature D4, the notification process is executed under at least one condition that a new setting of a setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. As a result, when a new setting value is set under an unfavorable situation, it is possible to prompt the user to deal with it.

Feature D5. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, on the condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set Information deriving means for deriving mode information to be performed (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that

  According to the feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means when a new setting value to be used is set. Derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the set value is changed.

  Feature D6. The special execution means derives the mode information by the information deriving means as the special processing on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in the special situation. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the gaming machine is not allowed to perform.

  According to the feature D6, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the mode information is not derived when the setting is performed in an unfavorable situation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being unnecessarily derived.

  Feature D7. The gaming machine according to D5 or D6, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature D7, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of aspect information in the aspect information storage unit, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods are grasped based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. In addition, even if a new setting value is repeated under a situation where no game is played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is being played is substantially the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature D9. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The special execution means is for executing the special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set to exceed the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the game machine as described in D8.

  According to the feature D9, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed does not remain in the aspect information storage unit. When the new setting is repeated, a special process is performed on the new setting. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with the action.

Feature D10. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature D10, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, on the condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set Information deriving means for deriving mode information to be performed (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player has a more advantageous setting value to be used. You will expect that. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented.

  In this case, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means when a new setting value to be used is set. Derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the set value is changed.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising aspect information storage means (another storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature E2, aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature E3, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage unit, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods are grasped based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. In addition, even if a new setting value is repeated under a situation where no game is played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is being played is substantially the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature E4. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value set by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, further comprising a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature E4, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed does not remain in the aspect information storage unit. When the new setting is repeated, a special process is performed on the new setting. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with the action.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information deriving unit derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature E5, since the mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature E6. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein a probability of the grant correspondence result varies in the grant determination according to the set value.

  According to the feature E6, in the so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant information;
Based on the result of granting that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination, a privilege granting unit (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player The function of executing the processes of S409 to S412),
A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
The grant determination means has, as the grant determination mode, a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively high and low,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the probability of the grant correspondence result varies at least in the low probability mode according to the set value.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to change the probability of an assignment correspondence result in at least the low probability mode according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. Thereby, even if it is a single game machine, it becomes possible to produce the situation where it becomes advantageous or unfavorable about the probability which becomes a grant correspondence result in low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode does not vary according to the set value.

  According to the feature F2, the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode is not changed according to the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein a selection mode of the privilege does not vary according to the set value.

  According to the feature F3, the probability of the result corresponding to the grant in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the selection mode of the privilege is not changed according to the set value. Can be limited to situations in low probability mode.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group F, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to the first information so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed). In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (function to execute display processing in the management CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the first to tenth embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63). In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63. In the twelfth embodiment, steps S3201, S3202, and S3204 in the main CPU 63. And the function of executing the process of step S3210, the function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding thereto is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. The information display means displays not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the other information. As a result, the information display means can be used effectively.

  Feature G2. The period according to which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the information display unit and the period during which the display corresponding to the other information is performed in the information display unit are distinguished from each other in the feature G1 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G2, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed in the information display unit by grasping the situation where the display is performed in the information display unit. Can be specified.

  Feature G3. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that the display corresponding to the different information is displayed. The gaming machine according to the characteristic G1 or G2, wherein the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display unit, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed in the information display unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature G4. As the information display means, individual information display means capable of performing a plurality of types of display (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, 11th to 14th). In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, comprising a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing a display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display means. In addition, since there are a plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode greatly different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the different information is performed. .

  Feature G5. The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 and second notification display devices in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G5, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means that is in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G6. The second information display control means is a specific individual information display means (first display) that is in a display state when displaying the mode information among the plurality of individual information display means when performing display corresponding to the different information. The first notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification in the thirteenth embodiment. Display device 204) in a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display unit when the display corresponding to the different information is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display unit when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature G5.

  According to the feature G6, in the specific individual information display means, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed can be displayed also when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has the same display contents as described above, it is not in a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is provided with the configuration of the feature G5. When the display corresponding to the different information is performed by the predetermined individual information display unit, the display is in a non-display state, and thus it is possible to specify which display is performed on the plurality of individual information display units.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to the characteristic G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature G7, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so that the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the different information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is not displayed even when the display of the aspect information is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, wherein

  According to the feature G8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing when the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  Feature G9. The second information display control means is one specific individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, eleventh, twelfth) among the plurality of individual information display means. In any of the features G5 to G8, in the fourth notification display device 204), display corresponding to the different information is performed in the fourth notification display device 204), and the remaining individual information display means is set in a non-display state. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature G9, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only one individual information display unit is in the display state, so that it is easy to grasp whether the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Become.

Feature G10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to Feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end portion in the predetermined direction among the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature G10, since one individual information display means for displaying corresponding to the different information is present at the end in the predetermined direction, it is grasped whether the display corresponding to the different information is performed. It becomes easy to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is an individual information display means of a type display target that is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (first notification display device 69a, eleventh in the first to tenth embodiments). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) perform display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means of a result display object that is a part of the display information (the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device in the 11th to 14th embodiments. 3 notification display device 203 and fourth notification display device 204) display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means of the type display target.

  According to the feature G11, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display unit of the type display target and the individual information display of the result display target The display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed in the means is performed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp | ascertain the aspect information used as display object. In this case, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the individual information display means of the type display target is in the non-display state, so the state of the type display non-display corresponds to the different information, It will be easier to grasp if other information is displayed.

Feature G12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting units in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is a possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit that can be in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting units to be in a light emitting state. When the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that is in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, wherein the gaming machine is a combination.

  According to the feature G12, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display corresponding to the other information is performed by setting the unit light emitting unit that can be in the light emission state to the light emission state, thereby performing the display corresponding to the different information. In order to diversify, it is possible to limit the content of the display corresponding to the mode information as much as possible. On the other hand, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state.

Feature G13. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to Feature G12, wherein the plurality of unit light emitting units include no unit light emitting unit that does not enter a light emitting state even when all the displays corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects are performed. Machine.

  According to the feature G13, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting units in an arbitrary combination are configured to be in the light emitting state. Therefore, the mode for diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information It is possible to minimize the restrictions on the display contents corresponding to the information.

Feature G14. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, thirteenth The embodiment includes a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 and second notification display devices in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in G13.

  According to the feature G14, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means that is in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G15. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control unit causes display corresponding to the different information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature G15, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can be used as a display unit for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature G16. The gaming machine according to Feature G15, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to a set value currently selected as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature G16, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can be also used as a display unit for displaying the setting value being changed.

  Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine to be performed as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature G17, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display unit for performing display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

  Feature G18. The second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state to be performed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the situation where the abnormal state does not occur. A gaming machine according to Feature G17.

  According to the feature G18, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G18, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to the first information so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed). In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (function to execute display processing in the management CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the first to tenth embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63). In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63. In the twelfth embodiment, steps S3201, S3202, and S3204 in the main CPU 63. And the function of executing the process of step S3210, the function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
With
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting units in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is a possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit that can be in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting units to be in a light emitting state. When the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that is in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being a combination.

  According to the feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. The information display means displays not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the other information. As a result, the information display means can be used effectively.

  In addition, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting unit that can be in the light emitting state is set in the light emitting state, and the display corresponding to the different information is performed, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information. Therefore, it is possible to limit the display contents corresponding to the mode information as much as possible. On the other hand, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emission state.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to Feature H1, wherein the plurality of unit light emitting units do not have a unit light emitting unit that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects are performed. Machine.

  According to the feature H2, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting units in an arbitrary combination are configured to be in the light emitting state. Therefore, the mode for diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information It is possible to minimize the restrictions on the display contents corresponding to the information.

Feature H3. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, thirteenth The embodiment includes a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 and second notification display devices in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

  According to the feature H3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means that is in the non-display state. Is possible.

  Feature H4. The game machine according to Feature H3, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when displaying corresponding to the aspect information.

  According to the feature H4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and therefore the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the different information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is not displayed even when the display of the aspect information is changed. The gaming machine according to the feature H3 or H4, wherein

  According to the feature H5, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing when the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

Feature H6. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control unit causes display corresponding to the different information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature H6, the information display unit that performs display corresponding to the mode information can be used as a display unit for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature H7. The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to a set value currently selected as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature H7, the information display unit that performs the display corresponding to the mode information can be used as the display unit for displaying the setting value being changed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
First information display control means (management side) for controlling display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. A function of executing processing for display in the CPU 112);
Second information display control means (function for executing abnormality display processing in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. The information display means displays not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine. As a result, the information display means can be used effectively.

  Feature I2. The second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state to be performed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the situation where the abnormal state does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

  According to the feature I2, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display unit.

  Feature I3. A feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that a period in which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the information display means is distinguished from a period in which the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the information display means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I3, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the information display unit by grasping the situation where the display is performed in the information display unit. Can be specified.

  Feature I4. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. The gaming machine according to the characteristic G1 or G2, wherein the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the characteristic I4, it is possible to identify which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed by the information display unit by grasping the display mode of the information display unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature I5. The information display means includes a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) each capable of performing a plurality of types of display. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display means. Further, since there are a plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode greatly different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. .

  Feature I6. The second information display control means is a predetermined individual that does not enter a non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) is in a non-display state.

  According to the feature I6, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. In this way, it is possible to clearly identify which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature I7. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, the second information display control unit is a specific individual information display unit (first unit that is in a display state when displaying the mode information among the plurality of individual information display units. 3 notification display device 203 and fourth notification display device 204) are in a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. A gaming machine according to feature I6.

  According to the characteristic I7, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the specific individual information display means can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, it does not become a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed with the configuration of the feature I7. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the predetermined individual information display means, the display is in the non-display state, so it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature I8. The gaming machine according to the characteristic I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed.

  According to the feature I8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and thus the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the abnormal state in which the display state is not displayed. It is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is not displayed even when the display of the aspect information is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, wherein

  According to the feature I9, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing when the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112) A function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to the first information so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed). In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (function to execute display processing in the management CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
With
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information in the information display means, and the information display means is not displayed even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed. A gaming machine characterized by not being maintained in a state.

  According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the display corresponding to the mode information regardless of the timing when the information display means is confirmed.

  Feature J2. As the information display means, individual information display means capable of performing a plurality of types of display (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, 11th to 14th). In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to the feature J1 is provided with a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

  According to the feature J2, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing a display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature J3. The game machine according to Feature J2, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when displaying corresponding to the mode information.

  According to the feature J3, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed, the display state is maintained. Maintained. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp | ascertain aspect information.

  Feature J4. The first information display control means is an individual information display means of a type display target that is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (first notification display device 69a, eleventh in the first to tenth embodiments). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) perform display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means of a result display object that is a part of the display information (the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device in the 11th to 14th embodiments. 3 informing display device 203 and 4th informing display device 204) display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is performed. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3

  According to the feature J4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display unit of the type display target and the individual information display of the result display target The display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed in the means is performed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp | ascertain the aspect information used as display object.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117) )
The history storage execution means is means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs (function of making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main MPU 63) when the predetermined event occurs. ).

  According to the feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the history information is stored by the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification can be prevented. Further, since history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored in a situation where it is not desirable to store history information. .

  Feature K2. The gaming machine according to claim K1, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution means until a restriction release event occurs.

  According to the feature K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined event due to an operation check immediately after the start of supply of operating power from being stored as history information.

Feature K3. Means for setting the restriction status when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of step S3610 in the main MPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the restriction status when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is not satisfied (function of executing step S3621 in the main MPU 63) When,
A gaming machine according to Feature K2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K3, there is a case where the restriction status is set and a case where the restriction condition is not set depending on whether or not the restriction condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction status from being set as necessary.

  Feature K4. The restriction situation may occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution means until the number of game balls discharged from the game area exceeds a predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area exceeds a predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power is started.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... 1st operation port, 34 ... 2nd operation port, 63 ... Main side CPU, 112 ... Management side CPU, 117 ... Memory for history, 171 ... Memory for another storage, 181-186 ... Setting 1 History memory for -6, 191 ... first history memory, 192 ... second history memory, 69a ... first notification display device, 69b ... second notification display device, 69c ... third notification display device 201 ... first notification display device, 201a to 201g ... display segment, 202 ... second notification display device, 202a-202g ... display segment, 203 ... third notification display device, 204 ... fourth notification use Display device.

Claims (4)

When a predetermined event occurs by executing a game, the history storage means for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means is provided,
The history storage execution means includes means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution unit until a restriction release event occurs. Means for setting the restriction status when a restriction condition is satisfied when supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started;
Means for not setting the restriction status when the restriction condition is not satisfied when supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started;
The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising:   The limit situation may occur as a situation from the start of supply of operating power to the history storage execution means until the number of game balls discharged from the game area exceeds a predetermined reference number. Item 4. The gaming machine according to any one of Items 1 to 3.

Images